page position: 1 @zeta.tweddle.com ... · failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts...

PAGE POSITION: 1 JOB: @zeta.tweddle.com/InfoShareAuthoroChrysler/CLS_InfoShareAuthoroChrysler/GRP_Owners_Manual/JOB_1382968-en-2014_GRAND_CHEROKEE_SRT_EE+14WK742-126-ENG-AA/DIV_Owners_Manual_v1

Table of Contents1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

1


2


1INTRODUCTION

• INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4• ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4• IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5• HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6• WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8• VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8• VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

3


INTRODUCTIONCongratulations on selecting your new ChryslerGroup LLC vehicle. Be assured that it repre-sents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-ing, and high quality - all essentials that aretraditional to our vehicles.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read theOwner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Besure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,particularly those used for braking, steering,and transmission and transfer case shifting.Learn how your vehicle handles on differentroad surfaces. Your driving skills will improvewith experience, but as in driving any vehicle,take it easy as you begin. When driving off-roador working the vehicle, don’t overload it orexpect it to overcome the forces of nature.Always observe local laws wherever you drive.

NOTE:After reviewing the owner information, itshould be stored in the vehicle for conve-nient referencing and remain with the ve-hicle when sold.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or a collision.

Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds mayresult in loss of control, collision with othervehicles or objects, going off the road, or over-turning; any of which may lead to serious injuryor death. Also, failure to use seat belts subjectsthe driver and passengers to a greater risk ofinjury or death.

To keep your vehicle running at its best, haveyour vehicle serviced at recommended intervalsby an authorized dealer or distributor who hasthe qualified personnel, special tools and equip-ment to perform all service.

The manufacturer and its distributors are vitallyinterested in your complete satisfaction with thisvehicle. If you encounter a service or warrantyproblem which is not resolved to your satisfac-tion, discuss the matter with your authorizeddealer or distributor’s management.

Your authorized dealer or distributor will behappy to assist you with any questions aboutyour vehicle.

ROLLOVER WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. Thisvehicle has a higher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity than many passengercars. It is capable of performing better in a widevariety of off-road applications. Driven in anunsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of con-trol. Because of the higher center of gravity, ifthis vehicle is out of control it may roll over whensome other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,or other unsafe driving actions that can causeloss of vehicle control. Failure to operate thisvehicle safely may result in a collision, rolloverof the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drivecarefully.

4


Failure to use the driver and passenger seatbelts provided is a major cause of severe orfatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

IMPORTANT NOTICEALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI-CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFOR-MATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICA-TION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVEDTO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared withthe assistance of service and engineering spe-cialists to acquaint you with the operation andmaintenance of your new vehicle. It is supple-mented by a Warranty Information Booklet andvarious customer-oriented documents. You areurged to read these publications carefully. Fol-lowing the instructions and recommendations inthis Owner’s Manual will help assure safe andenjoyable operation of your vehicle.

After you have read the Owner’s Manual, itshould be stored in the vehicle for convenientreference and remain with the vehicle whensold.

The manufacturer reserves the right to makechanges in design and specifications, and/or tomake additions to or improvements in its prod-ucts without imposing any obligations uponitself to install them on products previouslymanufactured.

The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describesthe features that are standard or available asextra cost options. Therefore, some of theequipment and accessories in this publicationmay not appear on your vehicle.

NOTE:Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual firstbefore driving your vehicle and before at-taching or installing parts/accessories ormaking other modifications to the vehicle.

In view of the many replacement parts andaccessories from various manufacturers avail-able on the market, the manufacturer cannot becertain that the driving safety of your vehicle willnot be impaired by the attachment or installationof such parts. Even if such parts are officially-approved (for example, by a general operatingpermit for the part or by constructing the part inan officially approved design), or if an individualoperating permit was issued for the vehicle afterthe attachment or installation of such parts, itcannot be implicitly assumed that the drivingsafety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore,neither experts nor official agencies are liable.The manufacturer only assumes responsibilitywhen parts, which are expressly authorized orrecommended by the manufacturer, are at-tached or installed at an authorized dealer. Thesame applies when modifications to the originalcondition are subsequently made on the manu-facturer’s vehicles.

Rollover Warning Label

5


Your warranties do not cover any part that themanufacturer did not supply. Nor do they coverthe cost of any repairs or adjustments that mightbe caused or needed because of the installationor use of non-manufacturer parts, components,equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do yourwarranties cover the costs of repairing damageor conditions caused by any changes to yourvehicle that do not comply with the manufactur-ers specifications.

Original Mopar® parts and accessories andother products approved by the manufacturer,including qualified advice, are available at yourauthorized dealer.

When it comes to service, remember that yourauthorized dealer knows your vehicle best, hasthe factory-trained technicians and genuineMopar® parts, and is interested in your satis-faction.

Copyright © 2013 Chrysler International.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the Table of Contents to determinewhich section contains the information you de-sire.

Since the specification of your vehicle dependson the items of equipment ordered, certaindescriptions and illustrations may differ fromyour vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’sManual contains a complete listing of all sub-jects.

Consult the following table for a description ofthe symbols that may be used on your vehicle orthroughout this Owner’s Manual:

6


7


WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGSagainst operating procedures that could resultin a collision or bodily injury. It also containsCAUTIONS against procedures that could re-sult in damage to your vehicle. If you do notread this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warningsand Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) isfound on a plate located on the left front cornerof the instrument panel pad, visible from outsideof the vehicle through the windshield. This num-ber also is stamped into the right front body,behind the right front seat. Move the right frontseat forward to allow better viewing of thestamped VIN.

NOTE:It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this ve-hicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-ness and safety and may lead to a collisionresulting in serious injury or death.

VIN Location

Right Front Body VIN Location

8


2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTINGYOUR VEHICLE

• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

• STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14• To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14• To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

• SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .15• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16• Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

• ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17• REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

• To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

9


• To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18• Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18• Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

• DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19• Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . .21

• KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22• WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

• Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

• LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27• Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

• OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29• Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31• Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32• Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34• Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34• Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34• Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . .35• Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36• Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36• Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . .39• Seat Belt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39• Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . .39

10


• Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40• Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .43• Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47• Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57• SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . .58• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

11


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.This system consists of a Key Fob with RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a KeylessIgnition Node (KIN).

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature

This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting YourVehicle" for further information).

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)This feature allows the driver to operate theignition switch with the push of a button, as longas the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitteris in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four oper-ating positions, three of which are labeled andwill illuminate when in position. The three posi-tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourthposition is START, during start RUN will illumi-nate.

NOTE:In case the ignition switch does not changewith the push of a button, the RKE transmit-ter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead bat-tery. In this situation a back up method canbe used to operate the ignition switch. Putthe nose side (side opposite of the emer-gency key) of the Key Fob against the EN-GINE START/STOP button and push to oper-ate the ignition switch.

Key FobThe Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insertthe square end of the key fob into the ignitionswitch located on the instrument panel androtate to the desired position. It also containsthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterand an emergency key, which stores in the rearof the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into thevehicle on the driver’s side should the battery inthe vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. Theemergency key is also for locking the glove box.You can keep the emergency key with you whenvalet parking.

NOTE:Entering a vehicle using the emergency keywith the security alarm armed, will result inthe alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob(even if the Key Fob battery is dead) into theignition switch to disarm security alarm.

To remove the emergency key, slide the me-chanical latch at the top of the Key Fob side-ways with your thumb and then pull the key outwith your other hand.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

12


NOTE:You can insert the double-sided emergency keyinto the lock cylinders with either side up.

Ignition Or Accessory On MessageOpening the driver’s door when the ignition is inACC or ON (engine not running), a chime willsound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF.In addition to the chime, the ignition or acces-sory on message will display in the cluster.

NOTE:With the Uconnect® system, the power win-dow switches, radio, power sunroof (ifequipped), and power outlets will remain ac-tive for up to 10 minutes after the ignition iscycled to the OFF position. Opening eitherfront door will cancel this feature. The timefor this feature is programmable. Refer to“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe Key Fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number of rea-sons. A child or others could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave a vehicle equippedwith Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC orON/RUN mode. A child could operatepower windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injury ordeath.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves.Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle,cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doorswhen leaving the vehicle unattended.

Emergency Key Removal

13


STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IFEQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with a passiveelectronic steering wheel lock. This lock pre-vents steering the vehicle without the ignitionkey. If the steering wheel is moved to one of thelock positions with the key in the off positions,the steering wheel will lock.

To Manually Lock The SteeringWheelWith the engine running, rotate the steeringwheel one-quarter revolution in either direction,turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn thesteering wheel slightly in either direction untilthe lock engages.

To Release The Steering Wheel LockCycle the ignition and start the engine.

NOTE:If you turned the wheel to the right to engagethe lock, you must turn the wheel slightly tothe right to disengage it. If you turned thewheel to the left to engage the lock, turn thewheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

SENTRY KEY®The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System preventsunauthorized vehicle operation by disabling theengine. The system does not need to be armedor activated. Operation is automatic, regardlessof whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiverto prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmedto the vehicle can be used to start and operatethe vehicle. The system will not allow the engineto crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start andoperate the vehicle. The system will shut theengine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fobis used to start the engine.

NOTE:A Key Fob that has not been programmed isalso considered an invalid key.

During normal operation, after turning on theignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light willturn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If thelight remains on after the bulb check, it indicates

that there is a problem with the electronics. Inaddition, if the light begins to flash after the bulbcheck, it indicates that someone used an invalidKey Fob to try to start the engine. Either of theseconditions will result in the engine being shut offafter two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on duringnormal vehicle operation (vehicle running forlonger than 10 seconds), it indicates that thereis a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,have the vehicle serviced as soon as possibleby an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is notcompatible with some after-market remotestarting systems. Use of these systems mayresult in vehicle starting problems and loss ofsecurity protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your newvehicle have been programmed to the vehicleelectronics.

14


Replacement KeysNOTE:Only Key Fobs that are programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to start andoperate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob isprogrammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-grammed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from thevehicle and lock all doors when leaving thevehicle unattended.

• With Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always re-member to place the ignition in the OFFposition.

At the time of purchase, the original owner isprovided with a four-digit Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure loca-tion. This number is required for authorizeddealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication ofKey Fobs may be performed at an authorizeddealer.

NOTE:When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizersystem serviced, bring all vehicle ignitionkeys with you to an authorized dealer.

Customer Key ProgrammingProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmittersmay be performed at an authorized dealer.

General InformationThe Sentry Key® operates on a carrier fre-quency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key® Im-mobilizer system is subject to the followingconditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence.

• This device must accept any interferencethat may be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —IF EQUIPPEDThis Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the ve-hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and ignition for unau-thorized operation. When the alarm is armed,the interior switches for door locks, and powerliftgate are disabled. If something triggers thealarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will providethe following audible and visible signals: thehorn will pulse, and the park lamps and/or turnsignals will flash.

To Arm The SystemFollow these steps to arm the Vehicle SecurityAlarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting AndOperating" for further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition systemis "OFF".

• For vehicles not equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignitionsystem is "OFF" and the key is physicallyremoved from the ignition.

15


2. Perform one of the following methods to lockthe vehicle:

• Press LOCK on the interior power door lockswitch with the driver and/or passenger dooropen.

• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Pas-sive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fobavailable in the same exterior zone (refer to"Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To KnowBefore Starting Your Vehicle" for furtherinformation).

• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Key-less Entry (RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The SystemThe Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmedusing any of the following methods:

• Press the UNLOCK button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle(if equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™"in "Things To Know Before Starting YourVehicle" for further information).

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of theOFF position.• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go™, press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™Start/Stop button (requires at least onevalid Key Fob in the vehicle).

• For vehicles not equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™, insert a valid key into theignition switch and turn the key to the ONposition.

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and theliftgate button on the RKE transmittercannot arm or disarm the Vehicle SecurityAlarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remainsarmed during power liftgate entry. Press-ing the liftgate button will not disarm theVehicle Security Alarm. If someone entersthe vehicle through the liftgate and opensany door the alarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed,the interior power door lock switches willnot unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro-tect your vehicle; however, you can createconditions where the system will give you afalse alarm. If one of the previously describedarming sequences has occurred, the VehicleSecurity Alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in thevehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. Ifthis occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and thebattery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Se-curity Alarm will remain armed when the batteryis reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, thehorn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Ve-hicle Security Alarm.

Tamper AlertIf something has triggered the Vehicle SecurityAlarm in your absence, the horn will sound threetimes and the exterior lights blink three timeswhen you unlock the doors. Check the vehiclefor tampering.

16


ILLUMINATED ENTRYThe courtesy lights will turn on when you usethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tounlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lightingin the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to“Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle” for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately30 seconds or they will immediately fade to offonce the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUNfrom the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console anddoor courtesy lights do not turn on if thedimmer control is in the �Dome ON� posi-tion (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not op-erate if the dimmer control is in the“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottomposition).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)The RKE system allows you to lock or unlockthe doors, or open the power liftgate fromdistances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) usinga hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. TheRKE transmitter does not need to be pointed atthe vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and abovedisables the system from responding to allRKE transmitter buttons for all RKE trans-mitters.

To Unlock The Doors And LiftgatePress and release the UNLOCK button on theRKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s dooror twice within five seconds to unlock all doorsand liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash toacknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminatedentry system will also turn on.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information.

1st Press Of Key Fob UnlocksThis feature lets you program the system tounlock either the driver’s door or all doors on thefirst press of the UNLOCK button on the RKEtransmitter. To change the current setting, referto “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

Flash Lights With Remote KeyThis feature will cause the turn signal lights toflash when the doors are locked or unlocked withthe RKE transmitter. This feature can be turnedon or turned off. To change the current setting,refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

17


Headlight Illumination On ApproachThis feature activates the headlights for up to 90seconds when the doors are unlocked with theRKE transmitter. The time for this feature isprogrammable on vehicles equipped throughUconnect®. To change the current setting, referto “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors And LiftgatePress and release the LOCK button on the RKEtransmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turnsignal lights will flash and the horn will chirp toacknowledge the signal.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information.

Programming AdditionalTransmittersProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmittersmay be performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery ReplacementThe recommended replacement battery is oneCR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handlingmay apply.

• Do not touch the battery terminals thatare on the back housing or the printedcircuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding themechanical latch on the back of the RKE trans-mitter sideways with your thumb and then pullthe key out with your other hand.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently prythe two halves of the RKE transmitter apart.Make sure not to damage the seal during re-moval.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency KeyRemoval

18


3. Remove the battery by turning the backcover over (battery facing downward) and tap-ping it lightly on a solid surface such as a tableor similar, then replace the battery. When re-placing the battery, match the + sign on thebattery to the + sign on the inside of the batteryclip, located on the back cover. Avoid touchingthe new battery with your fingers. Skin oils maycause battery deterioration. If you touch a bat-tery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snapthe two halves together.

General InformationThe RKE transmitter and receivers operate on acarrier frequency of 433.92 MHz as required byEEC regulations. These devices must be certifiedto conform to specific regulations in each indi-vidual country. Two sets of regulations are in-volved: ETS (European Telecommunication Stan-dard) 300–220, which most countries use, andGerman BZT federal regulation 225Z125, which isbased on ETC 300–220 but has additional uniquerequirements. Other defined requirements arenoted in ANNEX VI of COMMISSION DIRECTIVE95/56/EC. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from anormal distance, check for these two condi-tions:

1. Weak battery in RKE transmitter. The ex-pected life of the battery is a minimum ofthree years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as aradio station tower, airport transmitter, andsome mobile or CB radios.

DOOR LOCKSThe power door locks can be manually lockedfrom inside the vehicle by using the door lockknob. To lock each door, push the door lockknob on each door trim panel downward. Tounlock the front doors, pull the inside doorhandle to the first detent. To unlock the reardoors, pull the door lock knob on the door trimpanel upward. If the lock knob is down when thedoor is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,make sure the key is not inside the vehiclebefore closing the door.

Separating RKE Transmitter Case

19


WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in theevent of a collision, lock the vehicle doorsbefore you drive as well as when you parkand leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe Key Fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-ment may cause severe personal injuries ordeath.

(Continued)


• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-ing children to be in a vehicle unattendedis dangerous for a number of reasons. Achild or others could be seriously or fatallyinjured. Children should be warned not totouch the parking brake, brake pedal or theshift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave a vehicle equippedwith Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC orON/RUN mode. A child could operatepower windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch is located on eachfront door panel. Press the switch to lock orunlock the doors.

If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the KeyFob is not inside the vehicle before closing thedoor.

If you press the door lock switch while the KeyFob is in the ignition switch and the driver’s dooris open, the doors will not lock.

If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened frominside the vehicle without first unlocking thedoor. The door may be unlocked manually byraising the lock knob.

Manual Door Lock Knob Power Door Lock Switch

20


Automatic Door Locks — If EquippedThe auto door lock feature default condition isenabled. When enabled, the door locks will lockautomatically when the vehicle’s speed ex-ceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lockfeature can be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer per written request of thecustomer. Please see your authorized dealer forservice.

Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — IfEquippedIf Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlockall the doors when the driver’s door is opened ifthe vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEU-TRAL. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

Child-Protection Door LockSystem — Rear DoorsTo provide a safer environment for small chil-dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors areequipped with Child-Protection Door Lock sys-tem.

To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into thelock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK posi-tion.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite reardoor.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in acollision. Remember that the rear doors canonly be opened from the outside when theChild-Protection locks are engaged (locked).

NOTE:For emergency exit from the rear seats whenthe Child-Protection Door Lock System isengaged, manually raise the door lock knobto the unlocked position, roll down the win-dow, and open the door using the outsidedoor handle.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

21


KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™The Passive Entry system is an enhancementto the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™.This feature allows you to lock and unlock thevehicle’s door(s) without having to press theRKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect®” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entryand no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,the vehicle will re-lock and if equippedwill arm the theft alarm.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if ithas been raining on the Passive Entrydoor handle, the unlock sensitivity can beaffected, resulting in a slower responsetime.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle,grab the driver’s front door handle to unlock thedriver’s door automatically. The interior doorpanel lock knob will raise when the door isunlocked.

NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmedall doors will unlock when you grab hold of thedriver’s front door handle. To select between“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “UnlockAll Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect®” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle,grab the front passenger door handle to unlockall four doors automatically. The interior doorpanel lock knob will raise when the door isunlocked.

NOTE:All doors will unlock when the front passen-ger door handle is grabbed regardless of thedriver’s door unlock preference setting(“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “UnlockAll Doors 1st Press”).

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

22


Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of PassiveEntry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally lock-ing a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside yourvehicle, the Passive Entry system is equippedwith an automatic door unlock feature which willfunction if the ignition is OFF.

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the doorpanel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once allopen doors have been closed the vehiclechecks the inside and outside of the vehicle forany valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If oneof the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmittersis detected inside the vehicle, and no other validPassive Entry RKE transmitters are detectedoutside the vehicle, the Passive Entry Systemautomatically unlocks all vehicle doors andchirps the horn three times (on the third attemptALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKEtransmitter can be locked in the vehicle).

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is builtinto the electronic liftgate handle. With a validPassive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m)

of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate handlefor a power open on vehicles equipped withPower Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgatehandle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.

NOTE:If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgatewill open with the handle and no RKE Trans-mitter is required.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press thepassive entry lock button located to the right ofelectronic liftgate handle.

NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-grammed in EVIC, all doors will unlock whenyou push the button on the liftgate. If �Un-lock Driver Door 1st press� is programmedin Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock whenyou press the button on the liftgate Forfurther information, refer to “Uconnect®” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKEtransmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver orpassenger front door handle, press the doorhandle LOCK button to lock all four doors andliftgate.

Passive entry/Lock Button Location

1 — Electronic ReleaseSwitch

2 — Lock ButtonLocation

23


NOTE:The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of thehandle being used to lock the vehicle.

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressingthe door handle lock button. This could unlockthe door(s).

NOTE:

• After pressing the door handle LOCK but-ton, you must wait two seconds beforeyou can lock or unlock the doors, usingeither Passive Entry door handle. This isdone to allow you to check if the vehicle islocked by pulling the door handle, withoutthe vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operateif the RKE transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by usingthe RKE transmitter lock button or the lockbutton located on the vehicle’s interior doorpanel.

WINDOWS

Power WindowsThe power window controls are located on thedriver’s door trim panel. There is a single switchon the front passenger door and rear doorswhich operate the front passenger and rearpassenger door windows. The window controlswill operate only when the ignition switch is inthe ON/RUN or ACC position.Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

24


The power window switches remain active forup to 10 minutes after the ignition switch hasbeen turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front doorwill cancel this feature.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,and do not let children play with powerwindows. Do not leave the key fob in or nearthe vehicle, and do not leave a vehicleequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the

(Continued)


ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-larly unattended children, can become en-trapped by the windows while operating thepower window switches. Such entrapmentmay result in serious injury or death.

Auto-DownBoth the driver and front passenger windowswitches have an “Auto-Down” feature. Pressthe window switch past the first detent, release,and the window will go down automatically. Tocancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate theswitch in either the up or down direction andrelease the switch.

To open the window part way, press to the firstdetent and release it when you want the windowto stop.

Auto Up Feature With Anti-PinchProtection — Driver And Front PassengerDoor OnlyLift the window switch fully upward to the sec-ond detent, release, and the window will go upautomatically.

To stop the window from going all the way upduring the Auto Up operation, push down on theswitch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the windowswitch to the first detent and release when youwant the window to stop.

Power Window Switches Auto Down Window Switches

25


NOTE:If the window runs into any obstacle duringAuto Up it will reverse direction and then goback down. Remove the obstacle and use thewindow switch again to close the window. Anyimpact due to rough road conditions maytrigger the auto reverse function unexpectedlyduring Auto Up. If this happens, pull theswitch lightly to the first detent and hold it toclose the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when thewindow is almost closed. Be sure to clear allobjects from the window before closing.

Resetting The Auto Up FeatureShould the Auto Up feature stop working, thewindow probably needs to be reset. To resetAuto Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the win-dow completely and continue to hold the switchup for an additional two seconds after thewindow is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to thesecond detent to open the window completely andcontinue to hold the switch down for an additionaltwo seconds after the window is fully open.

Window Lockout ButtonThe Window Lockout button on the driver’s doorallows you to disable the window controls on therear doors. To disable the window controls onthe rear doors, press the Window Lockout but-ton. To enable the window controls, press theWindow Lockout button again.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the percep-tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-typesound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit windbuffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof(if equipped) in certain open or partially openpositions. This is a normal occurrence and canbe minimized. If the buffeting occurs with therear windows open, then open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. Ifthe buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,adjust the sunroof opening to minimize thebuffeting.

Auto Up Window Switches Window Lockout Button

26


LIFTGATETo Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is builtinto the electronic liftgate handle. With a validPassive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m)of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgatehandle to open with one fluid motion.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press thepassive entry lock button located to the right ofelectronic liftgate handle.

NOTE:The liftgate passive entry lock button willonly lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlockfeature is built into the electronic liftgatehandle.

WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi-sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. Youand your passengers could be injured bythese fumes. Keep the liftgate closed whenyou are operating the vehicle.

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be openedby pressing the electronic liftgatehandle (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go located in Things To KnowBefore Starting) or by pressing theLIFTGATE button on the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press theLIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twicewithin five seconds, to open the power liftgate.Once the liftgate is open, pressing the buttontwice within five seconds a second time willclose the liftgate.

The power liftgate may also be opened orclosed by pressing the LIFTGATE button lo-cated on the front overhead console, or closedby pressing the LIFTGATE button located on leftrear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Press-ing the LIFTGATE button located on left reartrim panel once will close the liftgate only, thisbutton cannot be used to open the liftgate.

Passive Entry/Lock Button Location

1 — Electronic ReleaseSwitch

2 — Lock ButtonLocation

27


When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmit-ter is pressed two times, the turn signals will flashtwice to signal that the liftgate is opening orclosing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in theEVIC) and the liftgate chime will be audible. Forfurther information, refer to "Uconnect®" in "Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel".

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction to theliftgate, an emergency liftgate latch re-lease can be used to open the liftgate. Theemergency liftgate latch release can beaccessed through a snap-in cover locatedon the liftgate trim panel.

• If liftgate is left open for an extendedperiod of time, the liftgate may need to beclosed manually to reset power liftgatefunctionality.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury orcargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgatetravel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate isclosed and latched before driving away.

NOTE:

• The power liftgate buttons will not oper-ate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehiclespeed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

• The power liftgate will not operate in tem-peratures below −22°F (−30°C) or tem-peratures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure toremove any buildup of snow or ice fromthe liftgate before pressing any of thepower liftgate switches.

• If anything obstructs the power liftgatewhile it is closing or opening, the liftgatewill automatically reverse to the closed oropen position, provided it meets suffi-cient resistance.

• There are also pinch sensors attached tothe side of the liftgate. Light pressureanywhere along these strips will causethe liftgate to return to the open position.

• The power liftgate must be in the full openposition for rear liftgate close button onthe left rear trim, near the liftgate openingto operate. If the liftgate is not fully open,press the Liftgate button on the Key Fobto fully open the liftgate, and then press itagain to close.

• If the liftgate handle is pulled while thepower liftgate is closing, the liftgate willreverse to the full open position.

• If the liftgate handle is pulled while thepower liftgate is opening, the liftgate motorwill disengage to allow manual operation.

• If the power liftgate encounters multipleobstructions within the same cycle, thesystem will automatically stop and the lift-gate must be opened or closed manually.

28


• If your liftgate is power closing and you putthe vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continueto power close. However, vehicle move-ment may result in a detection of an ob-struction.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allowpoisonous exhaust gases into your ve-hicle. You and your passengers could beinjured by these fumes. Keep the liftgateclosed when you are operating the vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgateopen, make sure that all windows areclosed, and the climate control blowerswitch is set at high speed. Do not use therecirculation mode.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features inyour vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for thedriver and all passengers

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and frontpassenger

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)located on top of the front seats (integratedinto the head restraint)

• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tains (SABIC) for the driver and passengersseated next to a window

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB)

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steer-ing wheel

• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant

• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners thatmay enhance occupant protection by manag-ing occupant energy during an impact event

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s andfront passenger) include Automatic LockingRetractors (ALRs), which lock the seat beltwebbing into position by extending the belt allthe way out and then adjusting the belt to thedesired length to restrain a child seat orsecure a large item in a seat — if equipped

Please pay close attention to the information inthis section. It tells you how to use your restraintsystem properly, to keep you and your passen-gers as safe as possible.

If you will be carrying children too small foradult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or theISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infantand child restraint systems. Refer to ISOFIX —Child Seat Anchorage System for more informa-tion.

NOTE:The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multi-stage inflator design. This allows the air bagto have different rates of inflation based onseveral factors, including the severity andtype of collision.

29


Here are some simple steps you can take tominimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

1. Children 12 years old and under shouldalways ride buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear facing infant seat infront of an air bag. A deploying passengerAdvanced Front Air Bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rearwardfacing infant seat.

• Only use a rearward-facing child restraintin a rear seat.

Children that are not big enough to wear thevehicle seat belt properly (see section on ChildRestraints) should be secured in the rear seat inchild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.Older children who do not use child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats should ride properlybuckled up in the rear seat. Never allow childrento slide the shoulder belt behind them or undertheir arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rearfacing child seat) must ride in the front passen-ger seat, move the seat as far back as possibleand use the proper child restraint. (Refer to“Child Restraints”)

You should read the instructions provided withyour child restraint to make sure that you areusing it properly.

2. All occupants should always wear theirlap and shoulder belts properly.

3. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far as practical toallow the Advanced Front Air Bags room toinflate.

4. Do not lean against the door or window. Ifyour vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-ment occurs, the side air bags will inflateforcefully into the space between you andthe door.

5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needsto be modified to accommodate a disabledperson, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under �If You NeedAssistance�.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead tomore severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belts even though you have air bags.

• Being too close to the steering wheel orinstrument panel during Advanced FrontAir Bag deployment could cause seriousinjury, including death. Air Bags need roomto inflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.

(Continued)

30



• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tain (SABIC) — if equipped and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also needroom to inflate. Do not lean against thedoor or window. Sit upright in the center ofthe seat.

• In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strike theinterior of your vehicle or other passen-gers, or you can be thrown out of thevehicle. Always be sure you and others inyour vehicle are buckled up properly.

• Being too close to the Supplemental SideAir Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) — ifequipped and/or Seat-Mounted Side AirBag (SAB) during deployment could causeyou to be severely injured or killed.

Buckle up even though you are an excellentdriver, even on short trips. Someone on theroad may be a poor driver and cause a collisionthat includes you. This can happen far awayfrom home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives,and they can reduce the seriousness of injuriesin a collision. Some of the worst injuries happenwhen people are thrown from the vehicle. Seatbelts reduce the possibility of ejection and therisk of injury caused by striking the inside of thevehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebelted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt web-bing retractor is designed to lock during verysudden stops or collisions. This feature allowsthe shoulder part of the belt to move freely withyou under normal conditions. However, in acollision the belt will lock and reduce the risk ofyou striking the inside of the vehicle or beingthrown out.

WARNING!

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger-ous. Seat belts are designed to go aroundthe large bones of your body. These arethe strongest parts of your body and cantake the forces of a collision best.

• Two people should never be belted into asingle seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

(Continued)

31



• Wearing your belt in the wrong place couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries, oryou could even slide out of part of the belt.Follow these instructions to wear your seatbelt safely and to keep your passengerssafe, too.

Lap/Shoulder Belt OperatingInstructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sitback and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back ofyour seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out thebelt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far asnecessary to make the belt go around your lap.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a“click.”

WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong bucklewill not protect you properly. The lap portioncould ride too high on your body, possiblycausing internal injuries. Always buckle yourbelt into the buckle nearest you.

• A belt that is too loose will not protect youproperly. In a sudden stop you could movetoo far forward, increasing the possibility ofinjury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

Latch Plate Latch Plate to Buckle

32



• A belt that is worn under your arm isdangerous. Your body could strike the in-side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,increasing head and neck injury. A beltworn under the arm can cause internalinjuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the belt over your shoulder sothat your strongest bones will take theforce in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will notprotect you from injury during a collision.You are more likely to hit your head in acollision if you do not wear your shoulderbelt. The lap and shoulder belt are meantto be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, belowyour abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion,pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lapbelt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull onthe lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of slidingunder the belt in a collision.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase therisk of injury in a collision. The belt forceswon’t be at the strong hip and pelvicbones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap part of your seat belt as low aspossible and keep it snug.

• A twisted belt may not protect you properly.In a collision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt is straight. If you can’tstraighten a belt in your vehicle, take it toyour authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest sothat it is comfortable and not resting on yourneck. The retractor will withdraw any slack inthe belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button onthe buckle. The belt will automatically retract toits stowed position. If necessary, slide the latchplate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in acollision and leave you with no protection.Inspect the belt system periodically, check-ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damagedparts must be replaced immediately. Do not

(Continued)

Removing Slack From Belt

33



disassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collisionif they have been damaged (bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.).

Lap/Shoulder Belt UntwistingProcedureUse the following procedure to untwist a twistedlap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possibleto the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above thelatch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme-diately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the foldedwebbing. The folded webbing must enter theslot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until itclears the folded webbing.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder BeltAnchorageIn the front seating positions, the shoulder beltcan be adjusted upward or downward to posi-tion the belt away from your neck. Press therelease button to release the anchorage, andthen move it up or down to the position thatserves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, youwill prefer a lower position, and if you are tallerthan average, you will prefer a higher position.When you release the button, verify the shoul-

der belt anchorage is latched by pulling down-ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it islocked into position.

NOTE:The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-age is equipped with an Easy Up feature.This feature allows the shoulder belt an-chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi-tion without pressing the release button. Toverify the shoulder belt anchorage islatched, pull downward on the shoulder beltanchorage until it is locked into position.

In the rear seat, move toward the center of theseat to position the belt away from your neck.

Seat Belts In Passenger SeatingPositionsThe seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractors (ALR) which are used to secure a childrestraint system. For additional information, re-fer to “Installing Child Restraints Using TheVehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”section. The chart below defines the type offeature for each seating position.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

34


Driver Center Passen-ger

First Row N/A N/A N/A

SecondRow

ALR ALR ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equippedwith an ALR and is being used for normalusage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALRis activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound asthe belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retractcompletely in this case and then carefully pullout only the amount of webbing necessary tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a "click."

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode(ALR) — If EquippedIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automaticallypre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove anyslack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic LockingMode is available on all rear passenger-seatingpositions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a childsafety seat is installed in a seating position thathas a belt with this feature. Children 12 years oldand under should always be properly restrained inthe rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic LockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulderbelt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-ward until the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates thesafety belt is now in the Automatic LockingMode.

How To Disengage The Automatic LockingModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt andallow it to retract completely to disengage theAutomatic Locking Mode and activate the ve-hicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• The belt and retractor assembly must bereplaced if the seat belt assembly Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature orany other seat belt function is not workingproperly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the belt and retractorassembly could increase the risk of injuryin collisions.

35


Energy Management FeatureThis vehicle has a safety belt system with anEnergy Management feature in the front seatingpositions to help further reduce the risk of injuryin the event of a head-on collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assem-bly that is designed to release webbing in acontrolled manner. This feature is designed tohelp reduce the belt force acting on the occu-pant’s chest.

Seat Belt PretensionersThe seat belts for both front seating positions areequipped with pretensioning devices that are de-signed to remove slack from the seat belt in theevent of a collision. These devices may improvethe performance of the seat belt by assuring thatthe belt is tight about the occupant early in acollision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-pants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:These devices are not a substitute forproper seat belt placement by the occupant.The seat belt still must be worn snugly andpositioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. Adeployed pretensioner or a deployed air bagmust be replaced immediately.

Supplemental Active HeadRestraints (AHR)These head restraints are passive, deployablecomponents, and vehicles with this equipmentcannot be readily identified by any markings,only through visual inspection of the head re-straint. The head restraint will be split in twohalves, with the front half being soft foam andtrim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) de-termines whether the severity, or type of rearimpact will require the Active Head Restraints

(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires de-ployment, both the driver and front passengerseat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, thefront half of the head restraint extends forwardto minimize the gap between the back of theoccupant’s head and the AHR. This system isdesigned to help prevent or reduce the extent ofinjuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts.

NOTE:The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or maynot deploy in the event of a front or sideimpact. However if during a front impact, asecondary rear impact occurs, the AHR maydeploy based on the severity and type of theimpact.

36


CAUTION!

All occupants, including the driver, shouldnot operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seatuntil the head restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to minimize the riskof neck injury in the event of a collision.

NOTE:For more information on properly adjustingand positioning the head restraint, refer to“Adjusting Active Head Restraints” in “Un-derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in acollision, you must reset the head restraint onthe driver’s and front passenger seat. You canrecognize when the Active Head Restraint hasbeen triggered by the fact that they have movedforward (as shown in step three of the resettingprocedure).

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

2. Position the hands on the top of the de-ployed AHR at a comfortable position.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head RestraintFront Half (Soft Foamand Trim)

3 — Head RestraintBack Half (DecorativePlastic Rear Cover)

2 — Seatback 4 — Head RestraintGuide Tubes

Hand Positioning Points On AHR

37


3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear ofthe vehicle then down to engage the lockingmechanism.

4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half shouldlock into the back decorative plastic half.

NOTE:

• If you have difficulties or problems reset-ting the Active Head Restraints, see anauthorized dealer.

• For safety reasons, have the Active HeadRestraints checked by a qualified special-ist at an authorized dealer.

1 — Downward Movement2 — Rearward Movement

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Lock-ing Mechanism

AHR In Reset Position

38


Enhanced Seat Belt Use ReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind thedriver and front passenger (if equipped withfront passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seatbelts. The feature is active whenever the igni-tion is on. If the driver or front seat passenger isunbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turnon and remain on until both front seat belts arefastened.

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins afterthe vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), byblinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light andsounding an intermittent chime. Once the se-quence starts, it will continue for the entireduration or until the respective seatbelts arefastened. After the sequence completes, theSeat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminateduntil the respective seat belts are fastened. Thedriver should instruct all other occupants tofasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt isunbuckled while traveling at speeds greaterthan 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provideboth audio and visual notification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not ac-tive when the front passenger seat is unoccu-pied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when ananimal or heavy object is on the front passengerseat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped).It is recommended that pets be restrained in therear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers thatare secured by seat belts, and cargo is properlystowed.

BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does notrecommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

NOTE:Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated,the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue toilluminate while the driver’s or front passen-ger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat beltremains unfastened.

Seat Belt Lock OutThe center rear seat belt system has a lock outfeature that will not allow you to extract thecenter webbing unless the rear seat upper latchis engaged.

Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenWe recommend that pregnant women use theseat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keepingthe mother safe is the best way to keep the babysafe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of thebelt across the thighs and as snug across thehips as possible. Keep the belt low so that itdoes not come across the abdomen. That waythe strong bones of the hips will take the force ifthere is a collision.

Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) — Air BagsThis vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags forboth the driver and front passenger as a supple-ment to the seat belt restraint systems. Thedriver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted inthe center of the steering wheel. The passen-ger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in theinstrument panel, above the glove compart-ment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossedon the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle isequipped with a Supplemental Driver Side KneeAir Bag mounted in the instrument panel belowthe steering column.

39


The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistageinflator design. This allows the air bag to havedifferent rates of inflation based on several fac-tors, including the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSide Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) toprotect the driver, front, and rear passengerssitting next to a window. The SABIC air bags,

are located above the side windows and theircovers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSeat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provideenhanced protection for an occupant during aside impact. The Supplemental Seat-MountedSide Air Bags are located in the outboard side ofthe front seats.

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• After any accident, the vehicle should betaken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Air Bag System ComponentsYour vehicle may be equipped with the followingair bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag

• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB)

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tains (SABIC)

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat BeltBuckle Switch

Advanced Front Air Bag FeaturesThe Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistagedriver and front passenger air bags. This systemprovides output appropriate to the severity and typeof collision as determined by the Occupant Re-straint Controller (ORC), which may receive infor-mation from the front impact sensors.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediatelyduring an impact that requires air bag deploy-ment. This low output is used in less severecollisions. A higher energy output is used formore severe collisions.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee BolsterLocations

1 — Driver AndPassenger AdvancedFront Air Bags

3 — SupplementalDriver Side Knee AirBag

2 — Knee Bolster

40


WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or nearthe air bag on the instrument panel, be-cause any such objects could cause harmif the vehicle is in a collision severeenough to cause the air bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manu-ally. You may damage the air bags and youcould be injured because the air bags mayno longer be functional. The protectivecovers for the air bag cushions are de-signed to open only when the air bags areinflating.

• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the kneebolster in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the kneebolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citi-zen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted SideAir Bags (SAB)Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB) may provide enhanced protection to helpprotect an occupant during a side impact. TheSAB is marked with an air bag label sewn intothe outboard side of the front seats.

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seambetween the front and side of the seat’s trimcover. Each air bag deploys independently; aleft side impact deploys the left air bag only anda right-side impact deploys the right air bagonly.

Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtain (SABIC)SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and ve-hicle rollover protection to front and rear seatoutboard occupants in addition to that providedby the body structure. Each air bag featuresinflated chambers placed adjacent to the headof each outboard occupant that reduce thepotential for side-impact head injuries. TheSABIC deploy downward, covering both win-dows on the impact side.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air BagLabel

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) Label Location

41


NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during deployment could cause youto be severely injured or killed.

• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the preten-sioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags onboth sides of the vehicle may deploy.

The system includes side impact sensors thatare calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SABand SABIC air bags during impacts that requireside air bag occupant protection.

WARNING!

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and rightSABIC, do not stack luggage or othercargo up high enough to block the locationof the SABIC. The area where the sidecurtain air bag is located should remainfree from any obstructions.

(Continued)


• Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the SAB; theperformance could be adversely affectedand/or objects could be pushed into you,causing serious injury.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, do not have any accessory itemsinstalled which will alter the roof, includingadding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do notadd roof racks that require permanent at-tachments (bolts or screws) for installationon the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roofof the vehicle for any reason.

Always sit upright as possible with your backagainst the seat back, use the seat belts prop-erly, and use the appropriate sized child re-straint, infant restraint or booster seat recom-mended for the size and weight of the child.

SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement tothe seat belt restraint system. Occupants, in-cluding children who are up against or veryclose to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seri-ously injured or killed. Occupants, especiallychildren, should not lean on or sleep against thedoor, side windows, or area where the SAB orSABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in aninfant or child restraint.

Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagThe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bagprovides enhanced protection and works to-gether with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bagduring a frontal impact.

Knee Impact BolstersThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect theknees of the driver and front passenger, andposition the front occupants for the best inter-action with the Advanced Front Air Bags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Ad-vanced Front Air Bags and the SupplementalDriver Knee Air Bag work with the knee impactbolsters to provide improved protection for thedriver and front passenger.

42


Air Bag Deployment Sensors AndControlsOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)The ORC is part of a regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the frontand/or side air bags in a frontal or side collisionis required. Based on the impact sensor’s sig-nals, a central electronic ORC deploys theAdvanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental DriverSide Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air BagInflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seatbelt pretensioners, as required, depending onseveral factors, including the severity and typeof impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags and SupplementalDriver Side Knee Air Bag are designed toprovide additional protection by supplementingthe seat belts in certain frontal collisions de-pending on several factors, including the sever-ity and type of collision. Advanced Front AirBags are not expected to reduce the risk ofinjury in rear, or side collisions.

The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemen-tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in allfrontal collisions, including some that may pro-duce substantial vehicle damage — for ex-ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides,and angle offset collisions. On the other hand,depending on the type and location of impact,Advanced Front Air Bags and SupplementalDriver Side Knee Air Bag may deploy in crasheswith little vehicle front-end damage but thatproduce a severe initial deceleration.

The side air bags will not deploy in all sidecollisions. Side air bag deployment will dependon the severity and type of collision.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle de-celeration over time, vehicle speed and damageby themselves are not good indicators ofwhether or not an air bag should have de-ployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection inall collisions, and also are needed to help keepyou in position, away from an inflating air bag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-tronic parts of the air bag system whenever theignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN

position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in theACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bagsystem is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supplysystem that may deploy the air bags even if thebattery loses power or it becomes disconnectedprior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Air BagWarning Light in the instrumentpanel for approximately four toeight seconds for a self-checkwhen the ignition is first turned to

the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, theAir Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORCdetects a malfunction in any part of the system,it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, eithermomentarily or continuously. A single chime willsound if the light comes on again after initialstartup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminatethe instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if amalfunction is noted that could affect the air bagsystem. The diagnostics also record the natureof the malfunction.

43


WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’t havethe air bags to protect you in a collision. If thelight does not come on as a bulb check whenthe ignition is first turned on, stays on afteryou start the vehicle, or if it comes on as youdrive, have an authorized dealer service theair bag system immediately.

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front AirBag Inflator UnitsThe Driver and Passenger Advanced Front AirBag Inflator Units are located in the center of thesteering wheel and on the right side of theinstrument panel. When the ORC detects acollision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags,it signals the inflator units. A large quantity ofnon-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad-vanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflationrates are possible, based on several factors,including the collision type and severity. Thesteering wheel hub trim cover and the upper

right side of the instrument panel separate andfold out of the way as the air bags inflate to theirfull size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time ittakes to blink your eyes. The air bags thenquickly deflate while helping to restrain thedriver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is ventedthrough the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the air bags do not interferewith your control of the vehicle.

Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagInflator UnitThe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bagunit is located in the instrument panel trimbeneath the steering column. When the ORCdetects a collision requiring the air bag, it sig-nals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemen-tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim coverseparates and folds out of the way allowing theair bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fullyinflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag(SAB) Inflator UnitsThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bagsare designed to activate only in certain sidecollisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requiresthe side air bags to inflate, based on the severityand type of collision.

Based on the severity and type of collision, theside air bag inflator on the crash side of thevehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity ofnon-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits throughthe seat seam into the space between theoccupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate inabout 10 milliseconds. The side air bag movesat a very high speed and with such a high forcethat it could injure you if you are not seatedproperly, or if items are positioned in the areawhere the side air bag inflates. This especiallyapplies to children.

44


Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtain (SABIC) Inflator UnitsDuring collisions where the impact is confinedto a particular area of the side of the vehicle, theORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depend-ing on the severity and type of collision. In theseevents, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only onthe impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated toinflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating sidecurtain air bag pushes the outside edge of theheadliner out of the way and covers the window.The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds(about one-quarter of the time that it takes toblink your eyes) with enough force to injure youif you are not belted and seated properly, or ifitems are positioned in the area where the sidecurtain air bag inflates. This especially appliesto children. The side curtain air bag is onlyabout 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because air bag sensors estimate decelerationover time, vehicle speed and damage are notgood indicators of whether or not an air bagshould have deployed.

NOTE:In a rollover the pretensioners, and/or SABand SABIC air bags may deploy on bothsides of the vehicle.

Front And Side Impact SensorsIn front and side impacts, impact sensors canaid the ORC in determining appropriate re-sponse to impact events.

Enhanced Accident Response SystemIn the event of an impact causing air bagdeployment, if the communication network re-mains intact, and the power remains intact,depending on the nature of the event the ORCwill determine whether to have the EnhancedAccident Response System perform the follow-ing functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery haspower or until the ignition key is turned off.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on aslong as the battery has power or until theignition key is removed.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-sponse System functions after an event, theignition switch must be changed from IGN ON toIGN OFF.

If A Deployment OccursThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed todeflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:Front and/or side air bags will not deploy inall collisions. This does not mean some-thing is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon air bag material may sometimescause abrasions and/or skin reddening to thedriver and front passenger as the air bagsdeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similarto friction rope burns or those you might getsliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.They are not caused by contact with chemi-cals. They are not permanent and normallyheal quickly. However, if you haven’t healedsignificantly within a few days, or if you haveany blistering, see your doctor immediately.

45


• As the air bags deflate, you may see somesmoke-like particles. The particles are a nor-mal by-product of the process that generatesthe non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.These airborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyeirritation, rinse the area with cool water. Fornose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. Ifthe irritation continues, see your doctor. Ifthese particles settle on your clothing, followthe garment manufacturer’s instructions forcleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags havedeployed. If you are involved in another collision,the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-ers cannot protect you in another collision.Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,and the front seat belt retractor assembliesreplaced by an authorized dealer immedi-ately. Also, have the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) system serviced as well.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bagsystem could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the air bagsystem is not there to protect you. Do notmodify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers tothe steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel.Do not modify the front bumper, vehiclebody structure, or add aftermarket sidesteps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part ofthe air bag system yourself. Be sure to tellanyone who works on your vehicle that ithas an air bag system.

(Continued)


• Do not attempt to modify any part of yourair bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly ifmodifications are made. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer for any air bagsystem service. If your seat, including yourtrim cover and cushion, needs to be ser-viced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachmentbolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seataccessories may be used. If it is necessaryto modify the air bag system for personswith disabilities, contact your authorizeddealer.

46


Air Bag Warning Light

You will want to have the air bagsready to inflate for your protection ina collision. The Air Bag WarningLight monitors the internal circuitsand interconnecting wiring associ-ated with air bag system electrical

components. While the air bag system is de-signed to be maintenance free, if any of thefollowing occurs, have an authorized dealer ser-vice the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come onduring the four to eight seconds when theignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUNposition.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on afterthe four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-mittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:If the speedometer, tachometer, or any enginerelated gauges are not working, the OccupantRestraint Controller (ORC) may also be dis-abled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate

for your protection. Promptly check the fuseblock for blown fuses. Refer to the label lo-cated on the inside of the fuse block cover forthe proper air bag fuses. See your authorizeddealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an event data re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

• Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash in-vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the ve-hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

47


Child RestraintsEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckledup all the time, including babies and children.

Mass GroupSeating Position (or other site)

Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center Intermediate Out-board Intermediate Center

Group 0 - Up to 10 kg X U U N/A N/A

Group 0+ - Up to13 kg

X U U N/A N/A

Group 1 - 9 to 18 kg X U U N/A N/A

Group II & III - 15 to36 kg

X U U N/A N/A

Key of letters used in the table above:

• U = Suitable for “universal” category re-straints approved for use in this age/weightgroup.

• UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal”category restraints approved for use in thismass group.

• L = Suitable for particular child restraintsgiven on attached list. These restraints maybe of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or“semi-universal” categories.

• B = Built-in restraint approved for the age/weight group.

• X = Seat position not suitable for children inthis age/weight group.

48


Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass Group Size Class Fixture FrontPassenger

RearOutboard

Rt./Lt.Rear Center

Intermedi-ate

Outboard

Intermedi-ate Center Other Sites

CarrycotF ISO/L1 X X X N/A N/A N/AG ISO/L2 X X X N/A N/A N/A

(1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

0 — up to10 kg

E ISO/R1 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A(1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

0+ — up to13 kg

E ISO/R1 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/AD ISO/R2 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/AC ISO/R3 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

(1) X X X N/A N/A N/A

I – 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/AC ISO/R3 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/AB ISO/F2 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/AB1 ISO/F2X X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/AA ISO/F3 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

(1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/AII – 15 to

25 kg (1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

49


Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass Group Size Class Fixture FrontPassenger

RearOutboard

Rt./Lt.Rear Center

Intermedi-ate

Outboard

Intermedi-ate Center Other Sites

III – 22 to36 kg (1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

Key of letters used in the table above:

• (1) For the CRS which do not carry theISO/XX size class identification (A to G), forthe applicable mass group, the car manufac-turer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISO-FIX child restraint system(s) recommendedfor each position.

• 1UF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward childrestraint systems of “universal” category ap-proved for use in the mass group.

• IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child re-straint systems (CRS) given in the attach-ment list. These ISOFIX CRS are those ofthe “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.

• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIXchild restraint systems in this mass groupand/or this size class.

Children 12 years or under should ride properlybuckled up in a rear seat, if available. Accordingto crash statistics, children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seats rather thanin the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraintsfor children from newborn size to the childalmost large enough for an adult safety belt.Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual toensure you have the right seat for your child.Use the restraint that is correct for your child.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can be-come a projectile inside the vehicle. Theforce required to hold even an infant on yourlap can become so great that you could nothold the child, no matter how strong you are.The child and others could be badly injured.Any child riding in your vehicle should be in aproper restraint for the child’s size.

Infants And Child RestraintsSafety experts recommend that children riderearward-facing in the vehicle until they are twoyears old or until they reach either the height orweight limit of their rear facing child safety seat.

50


Two types of child restraints can be usedrearward-facing: infant carriers and convertiblechild seats.

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facingin the vehicle. It is recommended for childrenfrom birth until they reach the weight or heightlimit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seatscan be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seatsoften have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so theycan be used rearward-facing by children whohave outgrown their infant carrier but are stillless than at least two years old. Children shouldremain rearward-facing until they reach thehighest weight or height allowed by their con-vertible child seat. Both types of child restraintsare held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder beltor the ISOFIX child restraint anchor system.Refer to “ISOFIX — Child Seat AnchorageSystem”.

When using certain Child Restraint Systemswith rigid attachments ISOFIX and foot standsextending to the vehicle floor, remove the ve-hicle floor mat prior to installation to ensure asecure fit. Refer to the Child Restraint Owner’sManual for additional information.

WARNING!

• Rearward-facing child seats must never beused in the front seat of a vehicle with afront passenger air bag. An air bag deploy-ment could cause severe injury or death toinfants in this position.

• Improper installation can lead to failure ofan infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions exactly when installing aninfant or child restraint.

• A rearward-facing child restraint shouldonly be used in a rear seat.

Here are some tips for getting the most out ofyour child restraint:• Before buying any restraint system, make

sure that it has a label certifying that it meetsall applicable Safety Standards. ChryslerGroup LLC also recommends that you try achild restraint in the vehicle seats where youwill use it before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for yourchild’s weight and height. Check the label onthe restraint for weight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that comewith the restraint. If you install the restraintimproperly, it may not work when you need it.

• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly asthe manufacturer’s instructions tell you.

WARNING!

When your child restraint is not in use, secureit in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove itfrom the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in thevehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it couldstrike the occupants or seatbacks and causeserious personal injury.

51


Older Children And Child RestraintsChildren who are two years old or who haveoutgrown their rear-facing convertible child seatcan ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seatsused in the forward-facing direction are forchildren who are over two years old or who haveoutgrown the rear-facing weight or height limitof their rear-facing convertible child seat. Chil-dren should remain in a forward-facing childseat with a harness for as long as possible, upto the highest weight or height allowed by thechild seat. These child seats are also held in thevehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the ISOFIXchild restraint anchorage system. Refer to “ISO-FIX — Child Seat Anchorage System”.

All children whose weight or height is above theforward-facing limit for the child seat should usea belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’sseat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit withknees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushionwhile the child’s back is against the seatback,they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.The child and belt-positioning booster seat areheld in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

Children Too Large For Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear theshoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs arelong enough to bend over the front of the seatwhen their back is against the seatback, shoulduse the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips andas snug as possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming orslouching can move the belt out of position.

• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,move the child closer to the center of thevehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoul-der belt under an arm or behind the back.

ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage SystemYour vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with thechild restraint anchorage system called ISOFIX.The ISOFIX system provides for the installationof the child restraint without using the vehicle’sseat belts, instead securing the child restraintusing lower anchorages and upper tether strapsfrom the child restraint to the vehicle structure.

ISOFIX-compatible child restraint systems arenow available. Child restraints having tetherstraps and hooks for connection to the toptether anchorages have been available forsome time. You are urged to take advantage ofall the available attachments provided with yourchild restraint in any vehicle.

NOTE:When using the ISOFIX attaching system toinstall a child restraint, please ensure thatall seat belts not being used for occupantrestraints are stowed and out of reach ofchildren. Remind all children in the vehiclethat the seat belts are not toys and shouldnot be played with, and never leave yourchild unattended in the vehicle.

The two outboard rear seating positions haveanchorages, child seats with fixed lower attach-ments must be installed in the outboard positionsonly. Regardless of the specific type of lowerattachment, never install ISOFIX-compatible childseats such that two seats share a common loweranchorage.

52


If you are installing ISOFIX-compatible child re-straints in adjacent rear seating positions, you canuse the ISOFIX anchors or the vehicle’s seat beltfor the outboard position, but you must use thevehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If yourchild restraints are not ISOFIX-compatible, youcan only install the child restraints using thevehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instruc-tions, refer to “Installing The ISOFIX-CompatibleChild Restraint System”.

Installing The ISOFIX-Compatible ChildRestraint SystemWe urge you to carefully follow the directions ofthe manufacturer when installing your child re-straint. Not all child restraint systems will beinstalled as described here. Again, carefullyfollow the installation instructions that were pro-vided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,located at the rear of the seat cushion where itmeets the seatback, and are just visible whenyou lean into the rear seat to install the childrestraint. You will easily feel them if you run yourfinger along the intersection of the seatback andseat cushion surfaces.

In addition, there are top tether strap anchor-ages behind each rear seating position locatedon the back of the outboard seats. To accessthe top tether strap anchorages behind the rearseat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from theseat back, this will expose the top tether strapanchorages.

ISOFIX Anchorages Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel ToAccess Top Tether Strap

Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located onSeatback)

53


WARNING!

Do not use the cargo tie downs located onthe load floor. Improper usage of the tethercan lead to a failure of an infant or childrestraint. The child could be badly injured orkilled.

Many, but not all, restraint systems will beequipped with separate straps on each side,with each having a hook or connector for attach-ment to the lower anchorage and a means ofadjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facinginfant restraints will also be equipped with atether strap, a hook for attachment to the tetherstrap anchorage and a means of adjusting thetension of the strap.

First, loosen the child seat adjusters on thelower straps and on the tether strap so that youcan more easily attach the hooks or connectorsto the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach thelower hooks or connectors over the top of theanchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover

material. Then, locate the tether anchoragedirectly behind the seat where you are placingthe child restraint and attach the tether strap tothe anchorage, being careful to route the tetherstrap to provide the most direct path betweenthe anchor and the child restraint. There aretwo top tether anchorages located on theback of the seat, behind the gap panel. Theyare not visible until you fold the gap paneldown. Do not use the cargo tie down hookslocated on the floor behind the seat. Finally,tighten both straps as you push the child re-straint rearward and downward into the seat,removing slack in the straps according to thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to theISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure of aninfant or child restraint. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions exactly when installing aninfant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using TheVehicle Seat BeltsThe seat belts in the passenger seating positionsare equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS).These types of seat belts are designed to keepthe lap portion of the seat belt tight around thechild restraint so that it is not necessary to use alocking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noiseif you extract the entire belt from the retractor andthen allow the belt to retract into the retractor. Foradditional information on ALR, refer to “AutomaticLocking Mode” description under “Seat Belts inPassenger Seating Positions” section. The chartbelow defines the seating positions with an Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latchplate.

Driver Center Passen-ger

First Row N/A N/A N/A

SecondRow

ALR ALR ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

54


Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:

1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pullenough of the seat belt webbing from the retrac-tor to route it through the belt path of the childrestraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.” Next, extract all the seatbelt webbing out of the retractor and then allowthe belt to retract into the retractor. As the beltretracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. Thisindicates the safety belt is now in the AutomaticLocking mode.

2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the child restraint.Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

For rearward facing infant seats secured in thecenter seat position with the vehicle seat belts,the rear center seat position has an armresttether that secures the arm rest in the upwardposition. To access the center seat arm resttether first lower the arm rest. The tether islocated behind the armrest and hooked onto theplastic seat backing.

Pull down on the tether to unhook it from theplastic seat backing, then raise the armrest andattach the tether hook to the strap located onthe front of the arm rest.

For center seating position route the tetherstrap over the seatback and headrest thenattach the hook to the tether anchor located onthe back of the outboard seats. For the out-board seating positions, route the tether underthe head restraints, and attach the hook to thetop tether anchor located on the back of theseat. To access the top tether strap anchoragesbehind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floorpanel away from the seat back, this will exposethe top tether strap anchorages.

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached

55


WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap couldlead to increased head motion and pos-sible injury to the child. Use only the an-chor positions directly behind the childseat to secure a child restraint top tetherstrap.

(Continued)


• Do not use the cargo tie downs located onthe load floor. Improper usage of the tethercan lead to a failure of an infant or childrestraint. The child could be badly injuredor killed.

Transporting PetsAir Bags deploying in the front seat could harmyour pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrownabout and possibly injured, or injure a passen-ger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in petharnesses or pet carriers that are secured byseat belts.

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel ToAccess Top Tether Strap

Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located onSeatback)

Top Tether Strap Mounting

56


ENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for thedrivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, andrear axle) in your new vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km).After the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle accelerationwithin the limits of local traffic laws contributesto a good break-in. However, wide-open throttleacceleration in low gear can be detrimental andshould be avoided.

The engine oil is a high performance syntheticlubricant, the transmission fluid and axle lubricantinstalled at the factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changesshould be consistent with anticipated climate andconditions under which vehicle operations willoccur. For the recommended viscosity and qualitygrades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight MineralOil in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil duringits first few thousand miles (kilometers) ofoperation. This should be considered a nor-mal part of the break-in and not interpretedas an indication of difficulty. Please checkyour oil level with the engine oil indicatoroften during the break in period. Add oil asrequired.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THECARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injury ordeath.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.


57


Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containcarbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless andodorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-scious and can eventually poison you. To avoidbreathing (CO), follow these safety tips:• Do not run the engine in a closed garage

or in confined areas any longer thanneeded to move your vehicle in or out ofthe area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows areclosed and the climate control BLOWERswitch is set at high speed. DO NOT use therecirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehiclewith the engine running, adjust your heatingor cooling controls to force outside air intothe vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound ofthe exhaust system, when exhaust fumes canbe detected inside the vehicle, or when theunderside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areasfor broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-tioned parts. Open seams or loose connectionscould permit exhaust fumes to seep into thepassenger compartment. In addition, inspectthe exhaust system each time the vehicle israised for lubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

Safety Checks You Should MakeInside The VehicleSeat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checkingfor cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged partsmust be replaced immediately. Do not disas-semble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replacedafter a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies mustbe replaced after a collision if they have beendamaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.). If there is any question regarding belt orretractor condition, replace the belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The light should come on and re-main on for four to eight secondsas a bulb check when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON. If the lightis not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays

on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

DefrosterCheck operation by selecting the defrost modeand place the blower control on high speed. Youshould be able to feel the air directed againstthe windshield. See your authorized dealer forservice if your defroster is inoperable.

58


Floor Mat Safety InformationAlways use floor mats designed to fit the foot-well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats thatleave the pedal area unobstructed and that arefirmly secured so that they cannot slip out ofposition and interfere with the pedals or impairsafe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can causeloss of vehicle control and increase the riskof serious personal injury.• Always make sure that floor mats are prop-

erly attached to the floor mat fasteners.• Never place or install floor mats or other

floor coverings in the vehicle that cannotbe properly secured to prevent them frommoving and interfering with the pedals orthe ability to control the vehicle.

(Continued)


• Never put floor mats or other floor cover-ings on top of already installed floor mats.Additional floor mats and other coveringswill reduce the size of the pedal area andinterfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regularbasis. Always properly reinstall and securefloor mats that have been removed forcleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fallinto the driver footwell while the vehicle ismoving. Objects can become trapped un-der the brake pedal and accelerator pedalcausing a loss of vehicle control.

• If required, mounting posts must be prop-erly installed, if not equipped from thefactory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installa-tion or mounting can cause interference withthe brake pedal and accelerator pedal opera-tion causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You ShouldMake Outside The VehicleTiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear anduneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,glass, or other objects lodged in the tread orsidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check thetires (including spare) for proper cold inflationpressure.

LightsHave someone observe the operation of brakelights and exterior lights while you work thecontrols. Check turn signal and high beamindicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight park-ing for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluidleaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or iffuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brakefluid leaks are suspected, the cause should belocated and corrected immediately.

59


60


3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOURVEHICLE

• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67• Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67• Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68• Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68• Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . .68• Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68• Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .69• Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69• Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69• Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

• BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .69• Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72• Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74• Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74• Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75• Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

61


• Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . .76• Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment — Recline . . . . . .76• Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . .77• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77• Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped. .79• Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80• 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82• Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

• DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84• Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84• Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To

Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85• Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85• Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

• TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87• LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

• Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88• Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88• Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights Only . . . . . . . . .89• Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Front And Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

62


• Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Courtesy Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93• Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93• High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

• WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

• TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96• POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96• HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .97• ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .98

• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98• To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

63


• ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .100• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101• Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102• To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Vary The Speed Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104• Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104• Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106• Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107• Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111• FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113• PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .115

• ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116• ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116• ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118• Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . .118• Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119• ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

64


• PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120• ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121• ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121• ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124• Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . .124• Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125• ParkSense® System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

• PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . .126• Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . .127• Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN. .128

• POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128• Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128• Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Venting Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Sunroof Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129• Ignition OFF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

• COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130• Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130• Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

65


• Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130• Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Closing Power Shade — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131• Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132• Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

• ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132• CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134• STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

• Glove Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135• Door Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135• Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

• CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137• Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137• Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137• Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .138• Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

• REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140• Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140• Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

66


MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night MirrorA single ball joint mirror is provided in thevehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixedposition at the windshield. The mirror installs onthe windshield button with a counterclockwiserotation and requires no tools for mounting. Themirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, andright for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rearwindow.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you canbe reduced by moving the small control underthe mirror to the night position (toward the rearof the vehicle). The mirror should be adjustedwhile the small control under the mirror is set inthe day position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — IfEquippedA single ball joint mirror is provided in thevehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixedposition at the windshield. The mirror installs onthe windshield button with a counterclockwiserotation and requires no tools for mounting. Themirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, andright for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rearwindow.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlightglare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE:

• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature isdisabled when the vehicle is in reversegear to improve rear view viewing.

• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature canbe turned on or off using the Uconnect®System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror

67


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-ing, never spray any cleaning solution di-rectly onto the mirror. Apply the solution ontoa clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outsidemirrors to center on the adjacent lane of trafficwith a slight overlap of the view obtained on theinside mirror.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passen-ger side convex mirror will look smaller andfarther away than they really are. Relying toomuch on your passenger side convex mirrorcould cause you to collide with another vehicleor other object. Use your inside mirror whenjudging the size or distance of a vehicle seen inthe passenger side convex mirror. Some ve-hicles will not have a convex passenger sidemirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding FeatureAll outside mirrors are hinged and may bemoved either forward or rearward to resist dam-age. The hinges have three detent positions:

• full forward

• full rearward and

• normal.

Outside Automatic DimmingMirrors — If EquippedThe driver and passenger outside mirrors willautomatically adjust for glare from vehicles be-hind you. This feature is controlled by the insideautomatic dimming. The mirrors will automati-cally adjust for headlight glare when the insidemirror adjusts.

Power MirrorsThe power mirror switch is located on thedriver’s side door trim panel.

The power mirror controls consist of mirror selectbuttons and a four-way mirror control switch. Toadjust a mirror, press the mirror select button for

the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirrorcontrol switch, press on any of the four arrows forthe direction that you want the mirror to move.

Power mirror preselected positions can be con-trolled by the optional Memory Seat Feature.Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understand-ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

Power Mirror Switch

1 — Mirror Direction Control2 — Mirror Selection

68


Power Folding Outside Mirrors — IfEquippedThe switch for the power folding mirrors islocated between the power mirror selectswitches (L and R).

Press the switch once and the mirrors will foldin, pressing the switch a second time will returnthe mirrors to the normal driving position.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frostor ice. This feature is activated when-ever you turn on the rear window de-froster. Refer to “Rear Window Fea-

tures” in “Understanding the Features of YourVehicle” for further information.

Illuminated Vanity MirrorsTo access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip downone of the visors.

Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light willturn on automatically.

Sun Visor Extension — If EquippedThis feature has a pull out extension on the sunvisor for increased coverage.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING(BSM) — IF EQUIPPEDThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system usestwo radar-based sensors, located inside the rearbumper fascia, to detect highway licensable ve-hicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warninglight will momentarily illuminate in both outsiderear view mirrors to let the driver know that thesystem is operational. The BSM system sen-sors operate when the vehicle is in any forwardgear or REVERSE and enters stand-by modewhen the vehicle is in PARK.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror Rear Detection Zones

69


The BSM detection zone covers approximatelyone lane on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or3.8 m). The zone starts at the outside rear viewmirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) tothe rear of the vehicle. The BSM system moni-tors the detection zones on both sides of thevehicle when the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher andwill alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• The BSM system does NOT alert thedriver about rapidly approaching vehiclesthat are outside the detection zones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOESNOT change if your vehicle is towing atrailer. Therefore, visually verify the adja-cent lane is clear for both your vehicleand trailer before making a lane change. Ifthe trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle,sports equipment) extends beyond theside of your vehicle, this may result in theBSM warning light remaining illuminatedthe entire time the vehicle is in a forwardgear.

The area on the rear fascia where the radarsensors are located must remain free of snow,ice, and dirt/road contamination so that theBSM system can function properly. Do not blockthe area of the rear fascia where the radarsensors are located with foreign objects (bum-per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects inthe detection zones by illuminating the BSMwarning light located in the outside mirrors inaddition to sounding an audible (chime) alertand reducing the radio volume. Refer to “ModesOf Operation” for further information.

The BSM system monitors the detection zonefrom three different entry points (side, rear,front) while driving to see if an alert is neces-sary. The BSM system will issue an alert duringthese types of zone entries.

Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)

Warning Light Location

70


Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanesfrom either side of the vehicle.

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicleon either side and enter the rear detection zonewith a relative speed of less than 30 mph(48 km/h).

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a rela-tive speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and thevehicle remains in the blind spot for approxi-mately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will beilluminated. If the difference in speed betweenthe two vehicles is greater than 15 mph(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking/Passing

71


The BSM system is designed not to issue analert on stationary objects such as guardrails,posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, oc-casionally the system may alert on such ob-jects. This is normal operation and your vehicledoes not require service.

The BSM system will not alert you of objectsthat are traveling in the opposite direction of thevehicle in adjacent lanes.

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only anaid to help detect objects in the blind spotzones. The BSM system is not designed todetect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.Even if your vehicle is equipped with theBSM system, always check your vehiclesmirrors, glance over your shoulder, and useyour turn signal before changing lanes. Fail-ure to do so can result in serious injury ordeath.

Rear Cross PathThe Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intendedto aid the driver when backing out of parkingspaces where their vision of oncoming vehiclesmay be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiouslyout of the parking space until the rear end of thevehicle is exposed. The RCP system will thenhave a clear view of the cross traffic and if anoncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

Stationary Objects

Opposing Traffic

RCP Detection Zones

72


RCP monitors the rear detection zones on bothsides of the vehicle, for objects that are movingtoward the side of the vehicle with a minimumspeed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), toobjects moving a maximum of approximately20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situa-tions.

NOTE:In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehiclescan be obscured by vehicles parked oneither side. If the sensors are blocked byother structures or vehicles, the system willnot be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in RE-VERSE, the driver is alerted using both thevisual and audible alarms, including reducingthe radio volume.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It isintended to be used to help a driver detect anoncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.Drivers must be careful when backing up,

(Continued)


even when using RCP. Always check care-fully behind your vehicle, look behind you,and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-mals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blindspots before backing up. Failure to do so canresult in serious injury or death.

Modes Of OperationModes Of Operation With EVIC

Three selectable modes of operation are avail-able in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® Sys-tem — If Equipped

Three selectable modes of operation are availablein the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to“Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect®Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding Your In-strument Panel” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, theBSM system will provide a visual alert in theappropriate side view mirror based on a de-tected object. However, when the system isoperating in RCP, the system will respond withboth visual and audible alerts when a detectedobject is present. Whenever an audible alert isrequested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide avisual alert in the appropriate side view mirrorbased on a detected object. If the turn signal isthen activated, and it corresponds to an alertpresent on that side of the vehicle, an audiblechime will also be sounded. Whenever a turnsignal and detected object are present on thesame side at the same time, both the visual andaudio alerts will be issued. In addition to theaudible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

73


NOTE:

• Whenever an audible alert is requested bythe BSM system, the radio is also muted.

• If the hazard flashers are on, the systemwill request the appropriate visual alertonly.

When the system is in RCP, the system shallrespond with both visual and audible alertswhen a detected object is present. Wheneveran audible alert is requested, the radio is alsomuted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; theRCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will beno visual or audible alerts from either the BSMor RCP systems.

NOTE:The BSM system will store the current oper-ating mode when the vehicle is shut off.Each time the vehicle is started the previ-ously stored mode will be recalled and used

SEATSSeats are part of the Occupant Restraint Sys-tem of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.


Power Seats — If EquippedSome models may be equipped with eight-waypower driver and front passenger seats. Thepower seat switches are located on the out-board side of the seat. There are two switchesthat control the movement of the seat cushionand the seatback.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or RearwardThe seat can be adjusted both forward andrearward. Push the seat switch forward or rear-ward, the seat will move in the direction of theswitch. Release the switch when the desiredposition has been reached.

Power Seat Switches

1 — Seatback Switch2 — Seat Switch

74


Adjusting The Seat Up Or DownThe height of the seats can be adjusted up ordown. Pull upward or push downward on theseat switch, the seat will move in the direction ofthe switch. Release the switch when the desiredposition has been reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or DownThe angle of the seat cushion can be adjustedup or down. Pull upward or push downward onthe front of the seat switch, the front of the seatcushion will move in the direction of the switch.Release the switch when the desired positionhas been reached.

Reclining The SeatbackThe angle of the seatback can be adjustedforward or rearward. Push the seatback switchforward or rearward, the seat will move in thedirection of the switch. Release the switch whenthe desired position is reached.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dan-gerous. Moving a seat while driving couldresult in loss of control which could cause acollision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fasteningthe seat belts and while the vehicle isparked. Serious injury or death could resultfrom a poorly adjusted seat belt.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined sothat the shoulder belt is no longer restingagainst your chest. In a collision you couldslide under the seat belt, which couldresult in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seator impede its ability to move as it may causedamage to the seat controls. Seat travel maybecome limited if movement is stopped by anobstruction in the seat’s path.

Passenger’s Power SeatSome models are equipped with a six-waypower passenger seat. The power seat switch islocated on the outboard side of the seat. Theswitch is used to control the movement of theseat and seat cushion.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or RearwardThe seat can be adjusted both forward andrearward. Push the seat switch forward or rear-ward, the seat will move in the direction of theswitch. Release the switch when the desiredposition has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or DownThe height of the seats can be adjusted up ordown. Pull upward or push downward on theseat switch, the seat will move in the direction ofthe switch. Release the switch when the desiredposition is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or DownThe angle of the seat cushion can be adjustedup or down. Pull upward or push downward onthe front of the seat switch, the front of the seatcushion will move in the direction of the switch.Release the switch when you have reached thedesired position.

75


Power Lumbar — If EquippedVehicles equipped with power driver or passen-ger seats may also be equipped with powerlumbar. The power lumbar switch is located onthe outboard side of the power seat. Push theswitch forward to increase the lumbar support.Push the switch rearward to decrease the lum-bar support. Pushing upward or downward onthe switch will raise and lower the position of thesupport.

Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward AdjustmentSome models may be equipped with manual frontdriver or passenger seats. The seats can beadjusted forward or rearward by using a barlocated by the front of the seat cushion, near thefloor.

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar locatedunder the seat cushion and move the seat forwardor rearward. Release the bar once you havereached the desired position. Then, using bodypressure, move forward and rearward on the seatto be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may bedangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury ordeath.

• Seats should be adjusted before fasteningthe seat belts and while the vehicle isparked. Serious injury or death could resultfrom a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Front Passenger SeatbackAdjustment — ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the lever located onthe outboard side of the seat, lean back to thedesired position and release the lever. To returnthe seatback, lift the lever, lean forward andrelease the lever.

Power Lumbar Switch

Adjustment Bar

76


WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so thatthe shoulder belt is no longer resting againstyour chest. In a collision you could slideunder the seat belt, which could result inserious injury or death.

Front Passenger Seat Fold-FlatFeature — If EquippedTo fold the seatback to the flat load-floor posi-tion, lift the recline lever and push the seatbackforward. To return to the seating position, raisethe seatback and lock it into place.

Heated Seats — If EquippedOn some models, the front and rear seats maybe equipped with heaters in both the seatcushions and seatbacks.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to theskin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or otherphysical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especiallyif used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion. This may causethe seat heater to overheat. Sitting in aseat that has been overheated couldcause serious burns due to the increasedsurface temperature of the seat.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the heatedseats to operate.

Recline Lever

Fold-Flat Passenger Seat

77


Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start,the driver’s heated seat and heated steeringwheel can be programmed to come on during aremote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System— If Equipped” in “Things To Know BeforeStarting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 —If EquippedThere are two heated seat switches that allowthe driver and passenger to operate the seatsindependently. The controls for each heater arelocated in the Uconnect® system screen.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heatsettings.

Press the “Climate” hard-key located on theright side of the Uconnect® display.

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-keyonce to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating.Press the soft-key a third time to shut theheating elements OFF.

NOTE:Once a heat setting is selected,heat will be felt within two tofive minutes.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heaterwill provide a boosted heat level during the firstfour minutes of operation. Then, the heat outputwill drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-levelsetting is selected, the system will automaticallyswitch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 min-utes of continuous operation. At that time, thedisplay will change from HI to LO, indicating thechange. The LO-level setting will turn OFFautomatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

Front Heated Seats With Uconnect®8.4A/8.4AN — If EquippedThere are two heated seat soft-keys that allowthe driver and passenger to operate the seatsindependently. The controls for each heater arelocated in the Uconnect® system screen.

Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-keyonce to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating.Press the soft-key a third time to shut theheating elements OFF.

NOTE:Once a heat setting is selected,heat will be felt within two tofive minutes.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heaterwill provide a boosted heat level during the firstfour minutes of operation. Then, the heat outputwill drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-levelsetting is selected, the system will automaticallyswitch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 min-utes of continuous operation. At that time, thedisplay will change from HI to LO, indicating thechange. The LO-level setting will turn OFFautomatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

78


Rear Heated SeatsOn some models, the two outboard seats areequipped with heated seats. There are twoheated seat switches that allow the rear pas-sengers to operate the seats independently.The heated seat switches for each heater arelocated on the rear of the center console.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heatsettings. Amber indicator lights in each switchindicate the level of heat in use. Two indicatorlights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW andnone for OFF.

Press the switch once to selectHIGH-level heating. Press the switcha second time to select LOW-levelheating. Press the switch a third timeto shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE:Once a heat setting is selected, heat will befelt within two to five minutes.

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, theheater will provide a boosted heat level duringthe first four minutes of operation. Then, theheat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. Ifthe HIGH-level setting is selected, the systemwill automatically switch to LOW-level after ap-proximately 60 minutes of continuous opera-tion. At that time, the number of illuminatedLEDs changes from two to one, indicating thechange. The LOW-level setting will turn OFFautomatically after approximately 45 minutes.

Front Ventilated Seats WithUconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — IfEquippedOn some models, both the driver and passen-ger seats are ventilated. Located in the seatcushion and seatback are small fans that drawthe air from the passenger compartment andpull air through fine perforations in the seatcover to help keep the driver and front passen-ger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.

To operate the system, press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the Uconnect® dis-play.

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-keyonce to select HI-level ventilation. Press thesoft-key a second time to select LO-level venti-lation. Press the soft-key a third time to shut offthe seat ventilation.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the venti-lated seats to operate.

Rear Heated Seat Switches

79


Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start,the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmedto come on during a remote start. Refer to“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

Head RestraintsHead restraints are designed to reduce the riskof injury by restricting head movement in theevent of a rear-impact. Head restraints shouldbe adjusted so that the top of the head restraintis located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must beproperly adjusted prior to operating the ve-hicle or occupying a seat. Head restraintsshould never be adjusted while the vehicle isin motion. Driving a vehicle with the headrestraints improperly adjusted or removedcould cause serious injury or death in theevent of a collision.

Active Head Restraints — Front SeatsActive Head Restraints are passive, deployablecomponents, and vehicles with this equipmentcannot be readily identified by any markings,only through visual inspection of the head re-straint. The head restraint will be split in twohalves, with the front half being soft foam andtrim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, thefront half of the head restraint extends forwardto minimize the gap between the back of theoccupant’s head and the AHR. This system isdesigned to help prevent or reduce the extent ofinjuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occu-pant Restraints” in “Things To Know BeforeStarting Your Vehicle” for further information

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on thehead restraint. To lower the head restraint,press the push button, located at the base of thehead restraint, and push downward on the headrestraint.

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can betilted forward and rearward. To tilt the headrestraint closer to the back of your head, pullforward on the bottom of the head restraint.Push rearward on the bottom of the head re-straint to move the head restraint away fromyour head.

Push Button

80


NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be re-moved by qualified technicians, for ser-vice purposes only. If either of the headrestraints require removal, see your au-thorized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active HeadRestraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-hicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Do not place items over the top of theActive Head Restraint, such as coats, seatcovers or portable DVD players. Theseitems may interfere with the operation ofthe Active Head Restraint in the event of acollision and could result in serious injuryor death.

(Continued)


• Active Head Restraints may be deployed ifthey are struck by an object such as ahand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-dental deployment of the Active Head Re-straint ensure that all cargo is secured, asloose cargo could contact the Active HeadRestraint during sudden stops. Failure tofollow this warning could cause personalinjury if the Active Head Restraint is de-ployed.

Head Restraints — Rear SeatsThe head restraints on the outboard seats arenot adjustable. They automatically fold forwardwhen the rear seat is folded to a load floorposition but do not return to their normal posi-tion when the rear seat is raised. After returningeither seat to its upright position, raise the headrestraint until it locks in place. The outboardheadrests are not removable.

Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

81


The center head restraint has limited adjust-ment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raiseit, or push downward on the head restraint tolower it.

WARNING!

Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in itslowered position could result in serious injuryor death in a collision. Always make sure theoutboard head restraints are in their uprightpositions when the seat is to be occupied.

NOTE:For proper routing of a Child Seat Tetherrefer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things toKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information.

60/40 Split Rear SeatTo Lower Rear SeatEither side of the rear seat can be lowered toallow for extended cargo space and still main-tain some rear seating room.

NOTE:Be sure that the front seats are fully uprightand positioned forward. This will allow therear seatback to fold down easily.

1. Pull upward on the release lever to releasethe seat.

NOTE:

• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down withthe left outboard or rear center seat beltbuckled.

• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down withthe right outboard seat belt buckled.

2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.

Rear Head Restraint

Rear Seat Release

82


To Raise Rear SeatRaise the rear seatback and lock it into place. Ifinterference from the cargo area prevents theseatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-culty returning the seat to its proper position.

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securelylocked into position. If the seatback is notsecurely locked into position the seat willnot provide the proper stability for childseats and/or passengers. An improperlylatched seat could cause serious injury.

• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-upor folded down position) should not beused as a play area by children when thevehicle is in motion. They could be seri-ously injured in a collision. Children shouldbe seated and using the proper restraintsystem.

Reclining Rear SeatTo recline the seatback, lift the lever located onthe outboard side of the seat, lean back andrelease the lever at the desired position. Toreturn the seatback, lift the lever, lean forwardand release the lever.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so thatthe shoulder belt is no longer resting againstyour chest. In a collision you could slideunder the seat belt, which could result inserious injury or death.

Rear Seat Folded Rear Seat Release

83


DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IFEQUIPPEDThis feature allows the driver to store up to twodifferent memory profiles for easy recall through amemory switch. Each memory profile contains de-sired position settings for the driver seat, sidemirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steeringcolumn (if equipped) and a set of desired radiostation presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter can also be programmed to recall thesame positions when the UNLOCK button ispressed.

NOTE:Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans-mitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked tomemory position 1 and the other transmittercan be linked to memory position 2.

The memory seat switch is located on thedriver’s door trim panel. The switch consists ofthree buttons:• The (S) button, which is used to activate the

memory save function• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to

recall either of two pre-programmed memoryprofiles.

Programming The Memory FeatureNOTE:To create a new memory profile, perform thefollowing:

Vehicles Equipped With KeylessEnter-N-Go

1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push theENGINE START/STOP button and cycle theignition to the ON/RUN position (Do not start theengine).

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desiredpreferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tiltand telescopic steering column [if equipped],and radio station presets).

3. Press and release the S (Set) button on thememory switch.

4. Within 5 seconds, press and release eitherof the memory buttons (1) or (2). The ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) will displaywhich memory position has been set.

Vehicles Not Equipped With KeylessEnter-N-Go

1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn theignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desiredpreferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustablepedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopicsteering column [if equipped], and radio stationpresets).

3. Press and release the S (Set) button on thememory switch.

Memory Seat Switch

84


4. Within 5 seconds, press and release eitherof the memory buttons (1) or (2). The ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) will displaywhich memory position has been set.

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without thevehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must bein PARK to recall a memory profile.

• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked toMemory feature can be enabled throughthe Uconnect® system screen. Refer to“Customer- Programmable Features —Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

Linking And Unlinking The RemoteKeyless Entry Transmitter ToMemoryYour RKE transmitters can be programmed torecall one of two pre-programmed memory pro-files by pressing the UNLOCK button on theRKE transmitter.

NOTE:Before programming your RKE transmittersyou must select the “Memory To FOB” fea-ture through the Uconnect® system screen.Refer to “Customer- Programmable Fea-tures — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform thefollowing:

1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (orchange the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equippedwith Keyless Enter-N-Go).

2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).

NOTE:If a memory profile has not already been set,refer to �Programming The Memory Feature�for instructions on how to set a memoryprofile.

3. Once the profile has been recalled, pressand release the SET (S) button on the memoryswitch, then press and release button (1) or (2)accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) willdisplay in the instrument cluster on vehiclesequipped with the EVIC.

4. Press and release the LOCK button on theRKE transmitter within 10 seconds.

NOTE:Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked toyour memory settings by following steps 1-4above and pressing the UNLOCK button(instead of LOCK) on the RKE transmitter inStep 4.

Memory Position RecallNOTE:The vehicle must be in PARK to recallmemory positions. If a recall is attemptedwhen the vehicle is not in PARK, a messagewill be displayed in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC).

85


Driver One Memory Position Recall

• To recall the memory settings for driver oneusing the memory switch , press MEMORYbutton number 1 on the memory switch.

• To recall the memory settings for driver oneusing the RKE transmitter, press the UN-LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linkedto memory position 1.

Driver Two Memory Position Recall

• To recall the memory setting for driver twousing the memory switch, press MEMORYbutton number 2 on the memory switch.

• To recall the memory settings for driver twousing the RKE transmitter, press the UN-LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linkedto memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of theMEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2).When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,driver’s mirror and the steering column stopmoving. A delay of one second will occur beforeanother recall can be selected.

Easy Entry/Exit SeatThis feature provides automatic driver seat po-sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-ing and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends onwhere you have the driver seat positioned whenyou remove the Key Fob from the ignition (orchange the ignition to OFF, for vehiclesequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).

• When you remove the Key Fob from theignition (or change the ignition to OFF, forvehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go),the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)rearward if the driver seat position is greaterthan or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward ofthe rear stop. The seat will return to itspreviously set position when you place theignition into the ACC or RUN position.

• When you remove the Key Fob from theignition (or change the ignition to OFF, forvehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go),the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in(7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver

seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rearstop. The seat will return to its previously setposition when you place the ignition to theACC or RUN position.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabledwhen the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At thisposition, there is no benefit to the driver bymoving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an asso-ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE:The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabledwhen the vehicle is delivered from the fac-tory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled(or later disabled) through the Uconnect®system screen. Refer to “Customer- Pro-grammable Features — Uconnect® Ac-cess 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

86


TO OPEN AND CLOSE THEHOODTo open the hood, two latches must be re-leased.

1. Pull the release lever located below theinstrument panel and in front of the driver’sdoor.

2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch tothe left and lift the hood.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam thehood to close it. Use a firm downward pushat the center of the hood to ensure that bothlatches engage.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle is inmotion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

LIGHTS

Headlight SwitchThe headlight switch is located on the left side ofthe instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.The headlight switch controls the operation of theheadlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped).

Hood Release

Safety Latch Location

87


To turn on the headlights, rotate theheadlight switch clockwise. Whenthe headlight switch is on the park-ing lights, taillights, license platelight and instrument panel lights

are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)position.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-light and fog light (if equipped) lenses thatare lighter and less susceptible to stonebreakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as

scratch resistant as glass and thereforedifferent lens cleaning procedures must befollowed.

• To minimize the possibility of scratchingthe lenses and reducing light output,avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To removeroad dirt, wash with a mild soap solutionfollowed by rinsing.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive cleaning components,solvents, steel wool or other abrasive mate-rials to clean the lenses.

Automatic Headlights — If EquippedThis system automatically turns the headlightson or off according to ambient light levels. Toturn the system on, rotate the headlight switchto the A (AUTO) position.

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay featureis also on. This means the headlights will stay onfor up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignitionswitch to the OFF position. To turn the automaticheadlights off, turn the headlight switch out of theAUTO position.

NOTE:The engine must be running before theheadlights will turn on in the AutomaticMode.

Headlights On Automatically WithWipersIf your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Head-lights, it also has this customer-programmablefeature. When your headlights are in the auto-matic mode and the engine is running, they willautomatically turn on when the wiper system ison. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Fea-tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensi-tive Wiper System” and it is activated, theheadlights will automatically turn on after thewipers complete five wipe cycles within approxi-mately one minute, and they will turn off ap-proximately four minutes after the wipers com-pletely stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers andWashers” in this section for further information.

Headlight Switch

88


NOTE:When your headlights come on during thedaytime, the vehicle will monitor outsidebrightness and decide if the instrumentpanel needs to be dimmed or not. Refer to“Lights” in this section for further informa-tion.

Automatic High Beam — If EquippedThe automatic high beam system provides in-creased forward lighting at night by automatinghigh beam control through the use of a digitalcamera mounted on the inside rearview mirror.This camera detects vehicle specific light andautomatically switches from high beams to lowbeams until the approaching vehicle is out ofview.

NOTE:

• If the windshield or automatic high beammirror is replaced, the automatic highbeam mirror must be re-aimed to ensureproper performance. See your local au-thorized dealer.

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlightsand taillights of vehicles in the field of

view will cause headlights to remain onlonger (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,film, and other obstructions (sticker, tollbox, etc.) on the windshield or cameralens will cause the system to functionimproperly.

Daytime Running Lights — IfEquippedThe Daytime Running Lights (bright intensity)come on whenever the engine is running, andthe transmission is not in the PARK position.The lights will remain on until the ignition isswitched to the OFF or ACC position or theparking brake is engaged.

The headlight switch must be used for normalnighttime driving.

Automatic Headlight Leveling — HIDHeadlights OnlyThis feature prevents the headlights from inter-fering with the vision of oncoming drivers.Headlight leveling automatically adjusts theheight of the headlight beam in reaction tochanges in vehicle pitch.

Headlight DelayTo aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped witha headlight delay that will leave the headlightson for approximately 90 seconds. This delay isinitiated when the ignition is turned OFF whilethe headlight switch is on, and then the head-light switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can becancelled by either turning the headlight switchon then off, or by turning the ignition ON.

The headlight delay time is programmable onvehicles equipped with an Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

Parking Lights And Panel Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instru-ment panel lights, rotate the headlightswitch clockwise. To turn off the park-

ing lights, rotate the headlight switch back to theO (Off) position.

89


Front And Rear Fog Lights — IfEquippedThe front and rear fog lights may be operated asdesired when visibility is poor due to fog. Thefog lights will activate in the following order:Press the headlight switch once and the frontfog lights come on. Press the switch a secondtime and the rear fog lights will come on (frontfog lights stay on). Press the switch a third timeand the rear fog lights turn off (front fog stayson). Press the switch a fourth times and thefront fog turns off. For vehicles without front fog,rear fog will activate on the first press.

NOTE:The headlight switch must first be turned tothe position lights or headlights positionbefore the fog lamp switch can be pushed in.

Interior LightsCourtesy and dome lights are turned on whenthe front doors are opened, when the dimmercontrol (rotating wheel on the right side of theheadlight switch) is rotated to the its farthestupward position, or if equipped, when the UN-LOCK button is pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is openand the interior lights are on, rotating the dim-mer control all the way down, to the OFF detent,will cause all the interior lights to go out. This isalso known as the “Party” mode because it

allows the doors to stay open for extendedperiods of time without discharging the vehicle’sbattery.

The brightness of the instrument panel lightingcan be regulated by rotating the dimmer controlup (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the head-lights are on you can supplement the brightnessof the odometer, trip odometer, radio and over-head console by rotating the control to its farthestposition up until you hear a click. This feature istermed the “Parade” mode and is useful whenheadlights are required during the day.

Fog Light Operation

Dimmer Control

90


Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lightsare left on after the ignition is turned OFF, achime will sound when the driver’s door isopened.

Battery SaverTo protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, loadshedding is provided for both the interior andexterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all theway up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes,the interior lights will automatically turn off.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition iscycled OFF, the exterior lights will automaticallyturn off after eight minutes. If the headlights areturned on and left on for eight minutes while theignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automati-cally turn off.

NOTE:Battery saver mode is cancelled if the igni-tion is ON.

Front Map/Reading LightsThe front map/reading lights are mounted in theoverhead console.

Each light can be turned on by pressing a switchon either side of the console. These buttons arebacklit for night time visibility. To turn the lightsoff, press the switch a second time. The lightswill also turn on when the UNLOCK button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pressed.

Front Map/Reading Lights

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

91


Courtesy LightsThe courtesy lights can be turned on by press-ing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lightsoff, press the lens a second time.

Ambient LightThe overhead console is equipped with anambient light feature. This light casts illumina-tion for improved visibility of the floor centerconsole and PRNDL area.

Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.

Turn SignalsMove the multifunction lever up or down and thearrows on each side of the instrument clusterflash to show proper operation of the front andrear turn signal lights.

NOTE:If either light remains on and does not flash,or there is a very fast flash rate, check for adefective outside light bulb. If an indicatorfails to light when the lever is moved, itwould suggest that the indicator bulb isdefective.

Courtesy Lights

Ambient Light Multifunction Lever

92


Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once, without movingbeyond the detent, and the turn signal (right orleft) will flash three times then automatically turnoff.

Flash-To-PassYou can signal another vehicle with your head-lights by partially pulling the multifunction levertoward the steering wheel. This will cause thehigh beam headlights to turn on until the lever isreleased.

High/Low Beam SwitchPush the multifunction lever toward the instru-ment panel to switch the headlights to highbeam. Pulling the multifunction back toward thesteering wheel will turn the low beams back on,or shut the high beams off.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS ANDWASHERSThe windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-cated on the multifunction lever on the left sideof the steering column. The front wipers are

operated by rotating a switch, located on theend of the lever. For information on the rearwiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features”in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-hicle”.

Windshield Wiper OperationRotate the end of the lever to one of the first fourdetent positions for intermittent settings, the fifthdetent for low wiper operation and the sixthdetent for high wiper operation.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow thatprevents the windshield wiper blades fromreturning to the “park” position. If the wind-shield wiper switch is turned off, and theblades cannot return to the “park” position,damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Multifunction Lever

Windshield Wiper Operation

93


Intermittent Wiper SystemUse one of the four intermittent wiper settingswhen weather conditions make a single wipingcycle, with a variable delay between cycles,desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from amaximum of approximately 18 seconds be-tween cycles (first detent), to a cycle every onesecond (fourth detent).

NOTE:If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washer OperationTo use the washer, push on the end of the lever(toward the steering wheel) and hold whilespray is desired. If the lever is pushed while inthe intermittent setting, the wipers will turn onand operate for several wipe cycles after theend of the lever is released, and then resumethe intermittent interval previously selected.

If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipersare in the off position, the wipers will operate forseveral wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-shield could lead to a collision. You might notsee other vehicles or other obstacles. Toavoid sudden icing of the windshield duringfreezing weather, warm the windshield withthe defroster before and during windshieldwasher use.

MistUse the Mist feature when weather conditionsmake occasional usage of the wipers neces-sary. Rotate the end of the lever downward tothe Mist position and release for a single wipingcycle.

NOTE:The mist feature does not activate thewasher pump; therefore, no washer fluid willbe sprayed on the windshield. The washfunction must be used in order to spray thewindshield with washer fluid.

Intermittent Wiper OperationWindshield Washer Operation

94


Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedThis feature senses moisture on the windshieldand automatically activates the wipers for thedriver. The feature is especially useful for roadsplash or overspray from the windshield wash-ers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of themultifunction lever to one of five settings toactivate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjustedwith the multifunction lever. Wiper delay posi-tion 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delayposition 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 shouldbe used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1

and 2 can be used if the driver desires lesswiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if thedriver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiperswitch in the OFF position when not using thesystem.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operatewhen the wiper switch is in the low orhigh-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not func-tion properly when ice, or dried salt wateris present on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X® or products containingwax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensingperformance.

• A customer programmable feature in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turnedoff. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further informa-tion.

The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will notoperate under the following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When theignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensingsystem will not operate until the wiper switchis moved, vehicle speed is greater than0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature isgreater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position —When the ignition is ON, and the transmis-sion is in the NEUTRAL position, the RainSensing system will not operate until thewiper switch is moved, vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift leveris moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehiclesequipped with Remote Starting system, RainSensing wipers are not operational when thevehicle is in the remote start mode. Once theoperator is in the vehicle and has placed theignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensingwiper operation can resume, if it has beenselected, and no other inhibit conditions (men-tioned previously) exist.

Mist Control

95


TILT/TELESCOPING STEERINGCOLUMNThis feature allows you to tilt the steering col-umn upward or downward. It also allows you tolengthen or shorten the steering column. Thetilt/telescoping lever is located below the steer-ing wheel at the end of the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the leverdownward (toward the floor). To tilt the steeringcolumn, move the steering wheel upward ordownward as desired. To lengthen or shortenthe steering column, pull the steering wheel

outward or push it inward as desired. To lock thesteering column in position, push the leverupward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury or death.

POWER TILT/TELESCOPINGSTEERING COLUMN — IFEQUIPPEDThis feature allows you to tilt the steering col-umn upward or downward. It also allows you tolengthen or shorten the steering column. Thepower tilt/telescoping steering column lever islocated below the multifunction lever on thesteering column.

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up ordown as desired. To lengthen or shorten thesteering column, pull the lever toward you orpush the lever away from you as desired.

NOTE:For vehicles equipped with Driver MemorySeat, you can use your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or the memoryswitch on the driver’s door trim panel toreturn the tilt/telescopic steering column topre-programmed positions. Refer to “DriverMemory Seat” in this section for furtherinformation.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

96


WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury or death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL —IF EQUIPPEDThe steering wheel contains a heating elementthat helps warm your hands in cold weather.The heated steering wheel has only one tem-perature setting. Once the heated steeringwheel has been turned on it will operate for upto 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.The heated steering wheel can shut off early ormay not turn on when the steering wheel isalready warm.

The heated steering wheel can be turned onand off using the Uconnect® System.

Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the“Heated Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heatedsteering wheel. Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn the heated steeringwheel off.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the heatedsteering wheel to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start,the heated steering wheel can be programmedto come on during a remote start. Refer to“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

Controls Soft-Key

Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

97


WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to theskin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or otherphysical conditions must exercise carewhen using the steering wheel heater. Itmay cause burns even at low tempera-tures, especially if used for long periods.

• Do not place anything on the steeringwheel that insulates against heat, such asa blanket or steering wheel covers of anytype and material. This may cause thesteering wheel heater to overheat.

ELECTRONIC SPEEDCONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Controltakes over accelerator operations at speedsgreater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo-cated on the right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:In order to ensure proper operation, theElectronic Speed Control System has beendesigned to shut down if multiple SpeedControl functions are operated at the sametime. If this occurs, the Electronic SpeedControl System can be reactivated by push-ing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFFbutton and resetting the desired vehicle setspeed.

To ActivatePush the ON/OFF button to activate the elec-tronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROLREADY will appear on the instrument cluster toindicate the electronic speed control is on. Toturn the system off, push the ON/OFF button asecond time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will ap-pear on the instrument cluster to indicate theelectronic speed control is off. The systemshould be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control sys-tem on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould accidentally set the system or cause itto go faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leavethe system OFF when you are not using it.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL3 — RESUME

98


To Set A Desired SpeedTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise ControlON. When the vehicle has reached the desiredspeed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button andrelease. Release the accelerator and the ve-hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once aspeed has been set a message CRUISE CON-TROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicatingwhat speed was set. An indicator CRUISE willalso appear and stay on in the instrumentcluster when the speed is set.

To DeactivateA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing theCANCEL button, or normal brake pressurewhile slowing the vehicle will deactivate Elec-tronic Speed Control without erasing the setspeed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button orturning the ignition switch OFF erases the setspeed memory.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push theRES button and release. Resume can be usedat any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, you can increase speed by pushing theSET (+) button. If the button is continuallypressed, the set speed will continue to increaseuntil the button is released, then the new setspeed will be established.

Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, you can increase the set speed bypressing and holding the SET + button. If thebutton is continually pressed, the set speed willcontinue to increase in 5 mph (5 km/h) incre-ments until the button is released. The increasein set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.

To decrease speed while the Normal (FixedSpeed) Cruise Control is set, push the SET (-)button. If the button is continually held in theSET (-) position, the set speed will continue todecrease until the button is released. Releasethe button when the desired speed is reached,and the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, the set speed can be decreased bypressing and holding the SET - button. If thebutton is continually pressed, the set speed willcontinue to decrease in 5 mph (5 km/h) incre-ments until the button is released. The decreasein set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.

To Accelerate For PassingPress the accelerator as you would normally.When the pedal is released, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On HillsThe transmission may downshift on hills tomaintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:The Electronic Speed Control system main-tains speed up and down hills. A slightspeed change on moderate hills is normal.

99


On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain mayoccur so it may be preferable to drive withoutElectronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerouswhere the system cannot maintain a constantspeed. Your vehicle could go too fast for theconditions, and you could lose control andhave an accident. Do not use Electronic SpeedControl in heavy traffic or on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) — IF EQUIPPEDAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases thedriving convenience provided by cruise controlwhile traveling on highways and major road-ways. However, it is not a safety system and notdesigned to prevent collisions.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control en-gaged in light to moderate traffic conditionswithout the constant need to reset your cruise

control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and aforward facing camera designed to detect avehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicleahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixedset speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,ACC will apply limited braking or accel-eration (not to exceed the original setspeed) automatically to maintain a presetfollowing distance, while matching thespeed of the vehicle ahead.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-nience system. It is not a substitute for activedriving involvement. It is always the driver’sresponsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,and weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis-tance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor-tantly, brake operation to ensure safe opera-

(Continued)


tion of the vehicle under all road conditions.Your complete attention is always requiredwhile driving to maintain safe control of yourvehicle. Failure to follow these warnings canresult in a collision and death or seriouspersonal injury.

• The ACC system:• Does not react to pedestrians, oncom-

ing vehicles, and stationary objects(e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jamor a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weatherconditions into account, and may belimited upon adverse sight distanceconditions.

• Does not always fully recognize com-plex driving conditions, which can re-sult in wrong or missing distance warn-ings.

(Continued)

100



• Can only apply a maximum of 40% ofthe vehicle’s braking capability, and willnot bring the vehicle to a completestop.

WARNING!

You should switch off the ACC system:• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,

sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situ-ations (i.e., in highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway offramp; when driving on roads that are wind-ing, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or havesteep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steepslopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.

Failure to follow these warnings can result in acollision and death or serious personal injury.

The Cruise Control system has two controlmodes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintain-ing an appropriate distance between ve-hicles.

• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode forcruising at a constant preset speed. For addi-tional information, refer to “Normal (FixedSpeed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.

NOTE:Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will notreact to preceding vehicles. Always beaware of the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the CruiseControl buttons. The two control modes functiondifferently. Always confirm which mode is se-lected.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)OperationThe speed control buttons (located on the rightside of the steering wheel) operates the ACCsystem.

NOTE:Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifi-cations to the vehicle will effect the perfor-mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control.

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISECONTROL ON/OFF2 — SET+/ACCEL3 — RESUME4 — SET-/DECEL5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE8 — CANCEL

101


Activating Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC)You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speedis above 19 mph (30 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in theREADY state, the Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC) displays “ACC Ready.”

When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

NOTE:You cannot enable ACC under the followingconditions:

• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• When you apply the brakes.

• When the parking brake is set.

• When the automatic transmission is inPARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.

• When the Vehicle speed is outside of thespeed range.

• When the brakes are overheated.

To ActivatePush and release the Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in theEVIC displays “ACC Ready.”

To turn the system OFF, push and release theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF buttonagain. At this time, the system will turn off andthe EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) Off.”

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)system on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould accidentally set the system or cause itto go faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have a collision. Always leavethe system off when you are not using it.

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

102


To Set A Desired ACC SpeedWhen the vehicle reaches the speed desired,push the SET + button and release. The EVICwill display the set speed.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Ifyou do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE”will display in the EVIC.

• The system will not be controlling the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicleahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-mined by the position of the acceleratorpedal.

When you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal ; the vehicle speed will go back to theset speed, or to the speed of the target vehiclewhose speed is less than the set speed.

To CancelThe following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• You depress the brake pedal.

• You press the CANCEL switch.

• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) eventoccurs.

• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Con-trol System (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.

NOTE:If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCSoff, ESC will automatically be re-engaged.

To Turn OffThe system will turn off and clear the set speedin memory if:

• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)ON/OFF button.

• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl ON/OFF button.

• You turn OFF the ignition.

• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.

To ResumeIf there is a set speed in memory press the RES(resume) button and then remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display thelast set speed.

NOTE:You can resume ACC from a minimum of19 mph (30 km/h).

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used iftraffic and road conditions permit. Resuminga set speed that is too high or too low forprevailing traffic and road conditions couldcause the vehicle to accelerate or deceleratetoo sharply for safe operation. Failure tofollow these warnings can result in a collisionand death or serious personal injury.

103


To Vary The Speed SettingWhile ACC is set, you can increase the setspeed by pressing the SET + button.

Pressing the SET + button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

If the SET + button is continually pressed, theset speed will continue to increase in 5 mph(5 km/h) increments until the button is released.The increase in set speed is reflected in theEVIC display.

While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-creased by pressing the SET - button.

Pressing the SET - button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

If the SET - button is continually pressed, theset speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph(10 km/h) increments until the button is re-leased. The decrease in set speed is reflectedin the EVIC display.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET +button or SET - button, the new speedvehicle is traveling will secure the new setspeed.

• When you use the SET - button to decel-erate, if the engine’s braking power doesnot slow the vehicle sufficiently to reachthe set speed, the brake system will auto-matically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system can only apply limitedbraking capability and will not bring thevehicle to a complete stop.

• The ACC system maintains set speed whendriving up hill and down hill. However, aslight speed change on moderate hills isnormal. In addition, downshifting may oc-cur while climbing uphill or descendingdownhill. This is normal operation and nec-essary to maintain set speed. When drivingup hill and down hill, the ACC system willcancel if the braking temperature exceedsnormal range (overheated).

Setting The Following Distance InACCThe specified following distance for ACC can beset by varying the distance setting between fourbars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me-dium) and one bar (short). Using this distancesetting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculatesand sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. Thisdistance setting displays in the EVIC.

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

104


To increase the distance setting, press theDistance Setting —Increase button and re-lease. Each time the button is pressed, thedistance setting increases by one bar (longer).

To decrease the distance setting, press theDistance Setting —Decrease button and re-lease. Each time the button is pressed, thedistance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle willmaintain the set speed. If a slower movingvehicle is detected in the same lane, the EVICdisplays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon,

and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-cally to maintain the distance setting, regard-less of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distanceuntil:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speedabove the set speed.

• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane orview of the sensor.

• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below15 mph (24 km/h) and the system automati-cally disengages itself.

• The distance setting is changed.

• The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-mation on ACC Activation).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is lim-ited; however, the driver can always apply thebrakes manually, if necessary.

NOTE:The brake lights will illuminate whenever theACC system applies the brakes.

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

105


A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACCpredicts that its maximum braking level is notsufficient to maintain the set distance. If thisoccurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in theEVIC and a chime will sound while ACC contin-ues to apply its maximum braking capacity.

When this occurs, you should immediately ap-ply the brakes as needed to maintain a safedistance from the vehicle ahead.

Overtake AidWhen driving with ACC engaged and followinga target vehicle, the system will provide anadditional acceleration to assist in passing ve-hicles in front. This additional acceleration istriggered when the driver utilizes the left turnsignal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,Overtake Aid is active only when passing on theleft hand side of the Target vehicles.

When a vehicle goes from a location with lefthand drive traffic to a location with right handdrive traffic, the ACC system will automaticallydetect traffic direction. In this condition, Over-take Aid is active only when passing on the rightside of the Target vehicle. This additional accel-eration is triggered when the driver utilizes theright turn signal. In this condition the ACCsystem will no longer provide Overtake Aid onthe left side until it determines that the vehiclehas moved back to a location with left handdrive traffic.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) MenuThe EVIC displays the current ACC systemsettings. The EVIC is located in the center of theinstrument cluster. The information it displaysdepends on ACC system status.

Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)ON/OFF button (located on the steering wheel)until one of the following displays in the EVIC:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speedsetting has not been selected, the display willread “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”

Press the SET + or the SET- button (located onthe steering wheel) and the following will displayin the EVIC:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will continue todisplay in the lower right hand corner of the cluster.

Brake Alert

106


The ACC screen will display once again if anyACC activity occurs, which may include any ofthe following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The EVIC will return to the last display se-lected after five seconds of no ACC displayactivity.

Display Warnings And Maintenance“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front OfVehicle” WarningThe “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front RadarSensor” warning will display and also a chimewill indicate when conditions temporarily limitsystem performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC systemmay also become temporarily blinded due to

obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In thesecases, the EVIC will display “ACC / FCW Un-available Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and thesystem will deactivate.

The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front RadarSensor” message can sometimes be displayedwhile driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tun-nels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). TheACC system will recover after the vehicle hasleft these areas. Under rare conditions, whenthe radar is not tracking any vehicles or objectsin its path this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE:If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe FrontRadar Sensor” warning is active Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available.For additional information refer to “Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in thissection.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the drivershould examine the sensor. It may requirecleaning or removal of an obstruction. Thesensor is located in the center of the vehiclebehind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, itis important to note the following maintenanceitems:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipethe sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautiousnot to damage the sensor lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor.Doing so could cause an ACC system mal-function or failure and require a sensorrealignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle isdamaged due to a collision, see your autho-rized dealer for service.

• Do not attach or install any accessories nearthe sensor, including transparent material oraftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause anACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the systemis no longer present, the system will return tothe “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and willresume function by simply reactivating it.

107


NOTE:

• If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe FrontRadar Sensor” message occurs frequently(e.g. more than once on every trip) withoutany snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,have the radar sensor realigned at your au-thorized dealer.

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protec-tor, an aftermarket grille or modifying thegrille is not recommended. Doing so mayblock the sensor and inhibit ACC / FCWoperation.

“Clean Front Windshield” WarningThe “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality CleanFront Windshield” warning will display and alsoa chime will indicate when conditions temporar-ily limit system performance. This most oftenoccurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snowor heavy rain and fog. The ACC system mayalso become temporarily blinded due to ob-structions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on wind-shield and fog on the inside of glass. In thesecases, the EVIC will display “ACC / FCW Lim-ited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” andthe system will have degraded performance.

The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality CleanFront Windshield” message can sometimes bedisplayed while driving in highly reflective areas(i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice andsnow). The ACC / FCW system will recover afterthe vehicle has left these areas. Under rareconditions, when the camera is not tracking anyvehicles or objects in its path this warning maytemporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the drivershould examine the windshield and the cameralocated on the back side of the inside rear viewmirror. They may require cleaning or removal ofan obstruction.

When the condition that created limited func-tionality is no longer present, the system willreturn to full functionality.

NOTE:If the “ACC / FCW Limited FunctionalityClean Front Windshield” message occursfrequently (e.g. more than once on everytrip) without any snow, rain, mud, or otherobstruction, have the windshield and for-ward facing camera inspected at your autho-rized dealer.

Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading

NOTE:When off-roading, it may be advisable toremove the ACC sensor. The sensor is lo-cated behind the front lower grille in thecenter of the vehicle. After removing thelower fascia, you may remove the lowersensor and bracket assembly.To remove the sensor follow these instructions:

1. Unplug the connector by depressing the twotabs on the connector and pulling it out. Do notpull by the wiring or use any tools to remove theconnector.

2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attach-ment from the back of the bracket.

3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connectthe bracket to the bumper.

NOTE:Do not change the adjustment fasteners orpull the sensor off of the bracket. Doing somay misalign the sensor.

108


Store the sensor and bracket assembly in asafe location. The wiring and connector must bestowed properly after the sensor and bracketassembly is removed.

A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumperbeam. Insert the wiring connector into the con-nector plug.

NOTE:When the sensor is removed, Adaptive CruiseControl, Normal Cruise Control, and ForwardCollision Warning will not be available and theforward collision warning On/Off button willstay illuminated. Once the vehicles ignitionhas been cycled the system will re-set andresume to full functionality.

To reinstall the sensor and bracket assemblyreverse the process above. The fastener torquerequired to assembly the bracket back to thebeam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 N·m).

Service ACC/FCW WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,there may be an internal system fault or atemporary malfunction that limits ACC function-ality. Although the vehicle is still drivable undernormal conditions, ACC will be temporarily un-available. If this occurs, try activating ACCagain later, following a key cycle. If the problempersists, see your authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACCIn certain driving situations, ACC may havedetection issues. In these cases, ACC maybrake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs tostay alert and may need to intervene.

Towing A Trailer

NOTE:Towing a trailer is not advised when usingACC.

Offset DrivingACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lanethat is offset from your direct line of travel, or avehicle merging in from a side lane. There maynot be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.The offset vehicle may move in and out of theline of travel, which can cause your vehicle tobrake or accelerate unexpectedly.

109


Turns And BendsWhen driving on a curve with ACC engaged, thesystem may decrease the vehicle speed andacceleration for stability reasons, with no targetvehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of thecurve the system will resume your original SetSpeed. This is a part of normal ACC systemfunctionality.

NOTE:On tight turns ACC performance may belimited.

Using ACC On HillsWhen driving on hills, ACC may not detect avehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steep-ness of the hills, ACC performance may belimited.

Lane ChangingACC may not detect a vehicle until it is com-pletely in the lane in which you are traveling. Inthe illustration shown, ACC has not yet detectedthe vehicle changing lanes and it may not detectthe vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC system

to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicleuntil it is completely in the lane. There may notbe sufficient distance to the lane-changing ve-hicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply thebrakes if necessary.

Narrow VehiclesSome narrow vehicles traveling near the outeredges of the lane or edging into the lane are notdetected until they have moved fully into thelane. There may not be sufficient distance to thevehicle ahead.

110


Stationary Objects And VehiclesACC does not react to stationary objects andstationary vehicles. For example, ACC will notreact in situations where the vehicle you arefollowing exits your lane and the vehicle aheadis stopped in your lane. Always be attentive andready to apply the brakes if necessary.

General Information

FCC Requirements For Vehicular RadarSystems

Classification Specifications:

47 C.F.R. Part 15

47 C.F.R Part 15.515

Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl ModeIn addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, aNormal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode isavailable for cruising at fixed speeds. The Nor-

mal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode isdesigned to maintain a set cruising speed with-out requiring the driver to operate the accelera-tor. Cruise Control can only be operated if thevehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).

To change between the different cruise controlmodes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CON-TROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns theACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) CON-TROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL (FixedSpeed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button willresult in turning ON (changing to) the Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlmode, the system will not react to vehiclesahead. Be sure to maintain a safe distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.Always be aware which mode is selected.Failure to follow these warnings can result ina collision and death or serious personalinjury.

111


To Set A Desired SpeedTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise ControlON. When the vehicle has reached the desiredspeed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button andrelease. Release the accelerator and the ve-hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once aspeed has been set a message CRUISE CON-TROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicatingwhat speed was set. An indicator CRUISE willalso appear and stay on in the instrumentcluster when the speed is set.

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, you can increase speed by pushing theSET (+) button. If the button is continuallypressed, the set speed will continue to increaseuntil the button is released, then the new setspeed will be established.

Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, you can increase the set speed bypressing and holding the SET + button. If the

button is continually pressed, the set speed willcontinue to increase in 5 mph (5 km/h) incre-ments until the button is released. The increasein set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.

To decrease speed while the Normal (FixedSpeed) Cruise Control is set, push the SET (-)button. If the button is continually held in theSET (-) position, the set speed will continue todecrease until the button is released. Releasethe button when the desired speed is reached,and the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, the set speed can be decreased bypressing and holding the SET - button. If thebutton is continually pressed, the set speed willcontinue to decrease in 5 mph (5 km/h) incre-ments until the button is released. The decreasein set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.

To CancelThe following conditions will cancel the Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearingthe memory:

• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.

• You press the CANCEL button.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Con-trol System (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The braking temperature exceeds normalrange (overheated).

• The shift lever is removed from the Driveposition.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push theRES button and release. Resume can be usedat any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

112


To Turn OffThe system will turn off and erase the set speedin memory if:

• You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON/OFFbutton.

• You turn off the ignition.

• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING(FCW) WITH MITIGATION — IFEQUIPPEDForward Collision Warning (FCW) WithMitigation OperationThe Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systemwith mitigation provides the driver with audiblewarnings, visual warnings (within the EVIC),and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driverwhen it detects a potential frontal collision. Thewarnings and limited braking are intended toprovide the driver with enough time to react,avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:FCW monitors the information from the for-ward looking sensors as well as the Elec-tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculatethe probability of a forward collision. Whenthe system determines that a forward colli-sion is probable, the driver will be providedwith audible and visual warnings and mayprovide a brake jerk warning. If the driverdoes not take action based upon these pro-gressive warnings, then the system will pro-vide a limited level of autonomous brakingto help slow the vehicle and mitigate thepotential forward collision. If the driver re-acts to the warnings by braking and thesystem determines that the driver intends toavoid the collision by braking but has notapplied sufficient brake force, the systemwill compensate and provide additionalbrake force as required.

When the system determines a collision withthe vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,the warning message will be deactivated.

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is5 mph (10 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objectsother than vehicles such as guard rails orsign posts based on the course prediction.This is expected and is a part of normal FCWactivation and functionality.

FCW Message

113


WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not in-tended to avoid a collision on its own, norcan FCW detect every type of potential col-lision. The driver has the responsibility toavoid a collision by controlling the vehicle viabraking and steering. Failure to follow thiswarning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF

NOTE:The default status of FCW is “On”, thisallows the system to warn you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you.The forward collision button is located on theswitch panel below the Uconnect® display.

To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forwardcollision button once to turn the system OFF(led turns on).

To turn the FCW system back ON, press theforward collision button again to turn the systemON (led turns off).

Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents thesystem from warning you of a possible collisionwith the vehicle in front of you.

Changing the Active Braking status to “Off”prevents the system from providing limited au-tonomous braking, or additional brake support ifthe driver is not braking adequately in the eventof a potential frontal collision.

NOTE:The FCW system state is kept in memoryfrom one key cycle to the next. If the systemis turned OFF, it will remain off when thevehicle is restarted.

Changing FCW And Active Braking StatusTo change the FCW and Active Braking set-tings with Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A SystemScreen — if equipped.

NOTE:The settings can only be changed when thevehicle is in PARK.

Follow these steps to set the FCW and ActiveBraking:

1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.

2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.

3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far orNear soft-key for your desired preference.

5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.

NOTE:A check mark will appear in the selectionbox to indicate the setting.

To change the FCW and Active Braking set-tings with Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen —if equipped.

NOTE:The settings can only be changed when thevehicle is in PARK.

114


Follow these steps to set the FCW and ActiveBraking:

1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on thelower right side of the Uconnect® system.


3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.

5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far orNear soft-key for your desired preference. Thenpress the back arrow.

6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.

7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.

The default status of FCW is the “Far” settingand the Active Braking is the “On” setting, thisallows the system to warn you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you whenyou are farther away and it applies limitedbraking. This gives you the most reaction timeto avoid a possible collision.

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,allows the system to warn you of a possible

collision with the vehicle in front of you whenyou are much closer. This setting provides lessreaction time than the “Far” setting, which al-lows for a more dynamic driving experience.

NOTE:

• The system will retain the last settingselected by the driver after ignition shutdown.

• FCW may not react to irrelevant objectssuch as overhead objects, ground reflec-tions, objects not in the path of the car,stationary objects that are far away, on-coming traffic, or leading vehicles withthe same or higher rate of speed.

• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with theunavailable screens.

FCW Limited WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-shield” momentarily, there may be a conditionthat limits FCW functionality. Although the ve-hicle is still drivable under normal conditions,the active braking may not be fully available.

Once the condition that limited the system per-formance is no longer present, the system willreturn to its full performance state. If the prob-lem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Service FCW WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault.Although the vehicle is still drivable under nor-mal conditions, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

PARKSENSE® REAR PARKASSIST — IF EQUIPPEDThe ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system pro-vides visual and audible indications of the dis-tance between the rear fascia and a detectedobstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parkingmaneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System UsagePrecautions for limitations of this system andrecommendations.

115


ParkSense® will retain the last system state(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cyclewhen the ignition is changed to the ON/RUNposition.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shiftlever is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabledat this shift lever position, the system will remainactive until the vehicle speed is increased toapproximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. Thesystem will become active again if the vehiclespeed is decreased to speeds less than ap-proximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense® SensorsThe four ParkSense® sensors, located in therear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind thevehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) fromthe rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-tion, depending on the location, type and orien-tation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning DisplayThe ParkSense® Warning screen will only bedisplayed if Sound and Display is selected fromthe Customer - Programmable Features sectionof the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is locatedwithin the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicatethe distance between the rear fascia/bumperand the detected obstacle. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” inUnderstanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

ParkSense® DisplayWhen the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC willdisplay the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle byshowing a single arc in the left and/or right rearregions based on the object’s distance andlocation relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in the left and/or rightrear region, the display will show a single arc inthe left and/or right rear region and the systemwill produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closerto the object, the display will show the single arcmoving closer to the vehicle and the tone willchange from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, tofast, to continuous.

Park Assist Ready

116


The vehicle is close to the obstacle when thewarning display shows one flashing arc andsounds a continuous tone. The following chartshows the warning alert operation when thesystem is detecting an obstacle:

Single 1/2 Second Tone

Slow Tone

Fast Tone

Continuous Tone

117


WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance(in/cm)

Greater than79 in (200 cm)

79-39 in(200-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm)

Less than12 in (30 cm)

Audible AlertChime

None Single 1/2Second Tone

Slow Fast Continuous

Arc None 4th Solid 3rdSolid

2ndFlashing

1stFlashing

Radio VolumeReduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE:ParkSense® will reduce the volume of theradio, if on, when the system is sounding anaudio tone.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled withthe ParkSense® switch.

When the ParkSense® switch ispressed to disable the system, theinstrument cluster will display the“PARKSENSE OFF” message forapproximately five seconds. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation. When the shift lever is moved toREVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVICwill display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message foras long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON whenParkSense® is disabled or requires service.The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF whenthe system is enabled. If the ParkSense®switch is pressed, and the system requiresservice, the ParkSense® switch LED will blinkmomentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Rear ParkAssist SystemDuring vehicle start up, when the ParkSense®Rear Park Assist System has detected a faultedcondition, the instrument cluster will actuate asingle chime, once per ignition cycle, and it willdisplay the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPEREAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UN-AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information. When the shift lever ismoved to REVERSE and the system has de-tected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display

118


the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REARSENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLESERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long asthe vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,ParkSense will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REARSENSORS” appears in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) make sure the outersurface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirtor other obstruction and then cycle the ignition.If the message continues to appear, see anauthorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-QUIRED” appears in the EVIC, see an autho-rized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® SystemClean the ParkSense® sensors with water, carwash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough orhard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® System UsagePrecautionsNOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free ofsnow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep theParkSense® system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-brations could affect the performance ofParkSense®.

• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instru-ment cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off,it remains off until you turn it on again, evenif you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to the RE-VERSE position and ParkSense® is turnedOFF, the EVIC will display “PARKSENSEOFF” message for as long as the vehicle is inREVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce thevolume of the radio when it is sounding atone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly,taking care not to scratch or damagethem. The sensors must not be coveredwith ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.Failure to do so can result in the systemnot working properly. The ParkSense®system might not detect an obstacle be-hind the fascia/bumper, or it could pro-vide a false indication that an obstacle isbehind the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn theParkSense® system OFF if obstacles such asbicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placedwithin 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in thesystem misinterpreting a close obstacle as asensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSEUNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” mes-sage to be displayed in the EVIC .

• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,ParkSense® should be disabled when thetailgate is in the lowered or open positionand the vehicle is in REVERSE. A loweredtailgate could provide a false indicationthat an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

119


CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it isunable to recognize every obstacle, includ-ing small obstacles. Parking curbs mightbe temporarily detected or not detected atall. Obstacles located above or below thesensors will not be detected when they arein close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when usingParkSense® in order to be able to stop in timewhen an obstacle is detected. It is recom-mended that the driver looks over his/hershoulder when using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using ParkSense®. Always checkcarefully behind your vehicle, look behindyou, and be sure to check for pedestrians,animals, other vehicles, obstructions, andblind spots before backing up. You are re-sponsible for safety and must continue to payattention to your surroundings. Failure to doso can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly rec-ommended that the ball mount and hitch ballassembly is disconnected from the vehiclewhen the vehicle is not used for towing.Failure to do so can result in injury ordamage to vehicles or obstacles becausethe hitch ball will be much closer to theobstacle than the rear fascia when the loud-speaker sounds the continuous tone. Also,the sensors could detect the ball mount andhitch ball assembly, depending on its sizeand shape, giving a false indication that anobstacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKSENSE® FRONT ANDREAR PARK ASSIST — IFEQUIPPEDThe ParkSense® Park Assist system providesvisual and audible indications of the distancebetween the rear and/or front fascia and a de-tected obstacle when backing up or moving for-ward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer toParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-tations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cyclewhen the ignition is changed to the ON/RUNposition.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shiftlever is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense®is enabled at one of these shift lever positions,the system will remain active until the vehiclespeed is increased to approximately 7 mph(11 km/h) or above. The system will becomeactive again if the vehicle speed is decreased tospeeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

120


ParkSense® SensorsThe four ParkSense® sensors, located in therear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind thevehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) fromthe rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-tion, depending on the location, type and orien-tation of the obstacle.

The six ParkSense® sensors, located in thefront fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front ofthe vehicle that is within the sensors’ field ofview. The sensors can detect obstacles fromapproximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm)from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontaldirection, depending on the location, type andorientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning DisplayThe ParkSense® Warning screen will only bedisplayed if Sound and Display is selected fromthe Customer - Programmable Features sectionof the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is locatedwithin the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicatethe distance between the rear fascia/bumperand/or front fascia/bumper and the detectedobstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)/Settings” in UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

ParkSense® DisplayThe warning display will turn ON indicating thesystem status when the vehicle is in REVERSEor when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstaclehas been detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle byshowing a single arc in the left and/or right rearregions based on the object’s distance andlocation relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in the left and/or rightrear region, the display will show a single arc inthe left and/or right rear region and the systemwill produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closerto the object, the display will show the single arcmoving closer to the vehicle and the tone willchange from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, tofast, to continuous.

Park Assist Ready

121


The vehicle is close to the obstacle when theEVIC display shows one flashing arc andsounds a continuous tone. The following chartshows the warning alert operation when thesystem is detecting an obstacle:

Single 1/2 Second Tone

Slow Tone

Fast Tone

Continuous Tone

122


WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance (in/cm) Greater than 79 in(200 cm)

79-39 in(200-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm)

Less than 12 in(30 cm)

Front Distance(in/cm)

Greater than 47 in(120 cm)

47-39 in(120-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm)

Less than 12 in(30 cm)

Audible Alert (Chime) None Single 1/2Second Tone(for rear only)

Slow (for rear only) Fast Continuous

Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Radio VolumeReduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE:ParkSense® will reduce the volume of theradio, if on, when the system is sounding anaudio tone.

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assistaudible alert (chime) after approximately 3 sec-onds when an obstacle has been detected, thevehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

Front and Rear chime volume settings can beselected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System— if equipped.

If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime vol-ume settings will not be accessible from theEVIC.

The chime volume settings include LOW, ME-DIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volumesetting is MEDIUM.

ParkSense® will retain its last known configu-ration state through ignition cycles.

123


Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled withthe ParkSense® switch.

When the ParkSense® switch ispressed to disable the system, theinstrument cluster will display the“PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-proximately five seconds. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation. When the shift lever is moved toREVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVICwill display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message foras long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON whenParkSense® is disabled or requires service.The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF whenthe system is enabled. If the ParkSense®switch is pressed, and the system requiresservice, the ParkSense® switch LED will blinkmomentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Park AssistSystemDuring vehicle start up, when the ParkSense®System has detected a faulted condition, theinstrument cluster will actuate a single chime,once per ignition cycle, and it will display the"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-SORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPEFRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UN-AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message forfive seconds. When the shift lever is moved toReverse and the system has detected a faultedcondition, the EVIC will display a "PARKSENSEUNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS","PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONTSENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLESERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for fiveseconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will bedisplayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the frontor rear sensor location depending on where thefault is detected. The system will continue toprovide arc alerts for the side that is functioningproperly. These arc alerts will interrupt the

"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-SORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPEFRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if anobject is detected within the five second pop-upduration. The car graphic will remain displayed foras long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REARSENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLEWIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) makesure the outer surface and the underside of therear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumperis clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or otherobstruction and then cycle the ignition. If themessage continues to appear see an autho-rized dealer.

If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICEREQUIRED" message appears in the EVIC,see an authorized dealer.

124


Cleaning The ParkSense® SystemClean the ParkSense® sensors with water, carwash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough orhard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® System UsagePrecautionsNOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper arefree of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris tokeep the ParkSense® system operatingproperly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-brations could affect the performance ofParkSense®.

• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instru-ment cluster will display “PARKSENSEOFF.” Furthermore, once you turnParkSense® off, it remains off until you turnit on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to theREVERSE position and ParkSense® isturned off, the instrument cluster will dis-play “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long asthe vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce thevolume of the radio when it is sounding atone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly,taking care not to scratch or damagethem. The sensors must not be coveredwith ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.Failure to do so can result in the systemnot working properly. The ParkSense®system might not detect an obstacle be-hind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or itcould provide a false indication that anobstacle is behind or in front of thefascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn theParkSense® system off if obstacles suchas bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. areplaced within 12 in (30 cm) from the rearfascia/bumper. Failure to do so can resultin the system misinterpreting a close ob-

stacle as a sensor problem, causing the“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICEREQUIRED” message to be displayed inthe instrument cluster.

• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,ParkSense® should be disabled when thetailgate is in the lowered or open position.A lowered tailgate could provide a falseindication that an obstacle is behind thevehicle.

• There may be a delay in the object detec-tion rate if the object is moving. This willcause the automatic braking applicationto be delayed.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it isunable to recognize every obstacle, includ-ing small obstacles. Parking curbs mightbe temporarily detected or not detected atall. Obstacles located above or below thesensors will not be detected when they arein close proximity.

(Continued)125


CAUTION! (Continued)

• The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing ParkSense® in order to be able to stopin time when an obstacle is detected. It isrecommended that the driver looks overhis/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using ParkSense®. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle, lookbehind you, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-structions, and blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for safety andmust continue to pay attention to yoursurroundings. Failure to do so can result inserious injury or death.

(Continued)


• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly rec-ommended that the ball mount and hitch ballassembly is disconnected from the vehiclewhen the vehicle is not used for towing.Failure to do so can result in injury ordamage to vehicles or obstacles becausethe hitch ball will be much closer to theobstacle than the rear fascia when the loud-speaker sounds the continuous tone. Also,the sensors could detect the ball mount andhitch ball assembly, depending on its sizeand shape, giving a false indication that anobstacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UPCAMERA — IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows youto see an on-screen image of the rear surround-ings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is putinto REVERSE. The image will be displayed onthe Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen

along with a caution note to “check entire sur-roundings” across the top of the screen. After fiveseconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®camera is located on the rear of the vehicle abovethe rear License plate.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE(with camera delay turned OFF), the rear cam-era mode is exited and the navigation or audioscreen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (withcamera delay turned ON), The rear view imagewith dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" un-less the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 MPH,the transmission is shifted into "PARK" or theignition is switched to the OFF position.

Active guide lines are overlaid on the image toillustrate the width of the vehicle and its projectedbackup path based on the steering wheel posi-tion. The active guide lines will show separatezones that will help indicate the distance to therear of the vehicle while a dashed center-line willindicate the center of the vehicle to assist withaligning to a hitch/receiver. The following tableshows the approximate distances for each zone:

126


Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the ParkView® Rear BackUp Camera. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check for pedes-trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,or blind spots before backing up. You areresponsible for the safety of your surround-ings and must continue to pay attention whilebacking up. Failure to do so can result inserious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView®should only be used as a parking aid. TheParkView® camera is unable to view everyobstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle mustbe driven slowly when using ParkView® tobe able to stop in time when an obstacle isseen. It is recommended that the driverlook frequently over his/her shoulder whenusing ParkView®.

NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substancebuilds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Donot cover the lens.

Turning ParkView® On Or Off —With Uconnect® 5.01. Turn the Radio on.

2. Press the “Settings” button.

3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the check box soft key next to“Parkview® Backup Camera” to enable/disable.

NOTE:A check mark will appear in the selectionbox to indicate the system is turned ON.

127


Turning ParkView® On Or Off —With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.


3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn the ParkView® system ON or OFF.

NOTE:A check mark will appear in the selectionbox to indicate the system is turned ON.

POWER SUNROOF — IFEQUIPPEDThe power sunroof switch is located betweenthe sun visors on the overhead console.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a ve-hicle, and do not leave the key in the ignitionswitch (or leave the ignition of a vehicleequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in theACC or ON/Run position). Occupants, par-ticularly unattended children, can becomeentrapped by the power sunroof while oper-ating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-ment may result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)


• In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be seriously in-jured or killed. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers arealso properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate thesunroof. Never allow your fingers, otherbody parts, or any object, to project throughthe sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof — ExpressPress the switch rearward and release it withinone-half second. The sunroof and sunshade willopen automatically from any position. The sun-roof and sunshade will open fully and stopautomatically. This is called “Express Open”.During Express Open operation, any movementof the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Power Sunroof Switch

128


Opening Sunroof — Manual ModeTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switchrearward to full open. Any release of the switchwill stop the movement. The sunroof and sun-shade will remain in a partially opened conditionuntil the switch is pushed and held rearwardagain.

Closing Sunroof — ExpressPress the switch forward and release it withinone-half second and the sunroof will closeautomatically from any position. The sunroof willclose fully and stop automatically. This is called“Express Close”. During Express Close opera-tion, any movement of the switch will stop thesunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeTo close the sunroof, press and hold the switchin the forward position. Any release of theswitch will stop the movement and the sunroofwill remain in a partially closed condition untilthe switch is pushed and held forward again.

Pinch Protect FeatureThis feature will detect an obstruction in theopening of the sunroof during Express Closeoperation. If an obstruction in the path of thesunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-cally retract. Remove the obstruction if thisoccurs. Next, press the switch forward andrelease to Express Close.

Venting Sunroof — ExpressPress and release the Vent button within onehalf second and the sunroof will open to thevent position. This is called “Express Vent”, andit will occur regardless of sunroof position. Dur-ing Express Vent operation, any movement ofthe switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade OperationThe sunshade can be opened manually. How-ever, the sunshade will open automatically asthe sunroof opens.

NOTE:The sunshade cannot be closed if the sun-roof is open.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the perceptionof pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type soundin the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffetingwith the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped)in certain open or partially open positions. This is anormal occurrence and can be minimized. If thebuffeting occurs with the rear windows open, openthe front and rear windows together to minimize thebuffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroofopen, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize thebuffeting or open any window.

Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft clothto clean the glass panel.

Ignition OFF OperationThe power sunroof switches remain active forup to approximately ten minutes after the igni-tion switch has been turned OFF. Openingeither front door will cancel this feature. Thetime is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

129


COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOFWITH POWER SHADE — IFEQUIPPEDThe CommandView® sunroof switch is locatedto the left between the sun visors on the over-head console.

The power shade switch is located to the rightbetween the sun visors on the overhead con-sole.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a ve-hicle, and do not leave the key in the ignitionswitch (or leave the ignition of a vehicleequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in theACC or ON/Run position). Occupants, par-ticularly unattended children, can becomeentrapped by the power sunroof while oper-ating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-ment may result in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be seriously in-jured or killed. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers arealso properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate thesunroof. Never allow your fingers, otherbody parts, or any object, to project throughthe sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof — ExpressPress the switch rearward and release it withinone-half second. The sunroof and sunshade willopen automatically from any position. The sun-roof and sunshade will open fully and stopautomatically. This is called “Express Open”.During Express Open operation, any movementof the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual ModeTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switchrearward to full open. Any release of the switchwill stop the movement. The sunroof and sun-shade will remain in a partially opened conditionuntil the switch is pushed and held rearwardagain.

Closing Sunroof — ExpressPress the switch forward and release it withinone-half second and the sunroof will closeautomatically from any position. The sunroof willclose fully and stop automatically. This is called“Express Close”. During Express Close opera-tion, any movement of the switch will stop thesunroof.

CommandView® Sunroof and Power ShadeSwitches

130


Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeTo close the sunroof, press and hold the switchin the forward position. Any release of theswitch will stop the movement and the sunroofwill remain in a partially closed condition untilthe switch is pushed and held forward again.

Opening Power Shade — ExpressPress the shade switch rearward and release itwithin one-half second and the shade will openautomatically from any position. The shade willopen and stop automatically at the half-openposition. Press the shade switch rearward againand release it within one-half second and theshade will open automatically to the full-openposition. This is called “Express Open”. DuringExpress Open operation, any movement of theshade switch will stop the shade.

Opening Power Shade — ManualModeTo open the shade, press and hold the switchrearward. The shade will open and stop auto-matically at the half-open position. Press andhold the shade switch rearward again and theshade will open automatically to the full-openposition. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the shade will remain in a par-tially opened condition until the switch is pushedand held rearward again.

Closing Power Shade — ExpressPress the switch forward and release it withinone-half second and the shade will close auto-matically from any position. If the sunroof iscompletely closed the shade will close fully andstop automatically. This is called “ExpressClose”. During Express Close operation, anymovement of the switch will stop the shade.

NOTE:If the sunroof is open, the shade will close tothe half-open position. Pressing the shadeclose button again will automatically closeboth the sunroof and shade completely.

Closing Power Shade — ManualModeTo close the shade, press and hold the switch inthe forward position. Any release of the switchwill stop the movement and the shade willremain in a partially closed condition until theswitch is pushed and held forward again.

Pinch Protect FeatureThis feature will detect an obstruction in theopening of the sunroof during Express Closeoperation. If an obstruction in the path of thesunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-cally retract. Remove the obstruction if thisoccurs. Next, press the switch forward andrelease to Express Close.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the percep-tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-typesound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit windbuffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof(if equipped) in certain open or partially openpositions. This is a normal occurrence and canbe minimized. If the buffeting occurs with therear windows open, open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. Ifthe buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,adjust the sunroof opening to minimize thebuffeting or open any window.

Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a non-abrasive cleaner and a softcloth to clean the glass panel.

131


Ignition OFF OperationThe power sunroof switches can be programmed toremain active for up to approximately ten minutesafter the ignition switch has been turned OFF.Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (Sys-tem Setup)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

NOTE:Opening either front door will cancel thisfeature.

Sunroof Fully ClosedPress the switch forward and release to ensurethat the sunroof is fully closed.

ELECTRICAL POWEROUTLETSYour vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)power outlets that can be used to power cellularphones, small electronics and other low pow-ered electrical accessories. The power outletsare labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.

Power outlets labeled with a “key” are poweredwhen the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCposition, while the outlets labeled with a “bat-tery” are connected directly to the battery andpowered at all times.

NOTE:

• All accessories connected to the “bat-tery” powered outlets should be removedor turned off when the vehicle is not inuse to protect the battery against dis-charge.

• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation,a MOPAR® knob and element must beused.

CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not insert any other object inthe power outlets as this will damage theoutlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damage not coveredby your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The front power outlet is located inside thestorage area on the center stack of the instru-ment panel. Push inward on the storage lid toopen the compartment and gain access to thispower outlet.

In addition to the front power outlet, there is alsoa power outlet located in the storage area of thecenter console.

Front Power Outlet

132


The rear power outlet is located in the right rearcargo area.

NOTE:The rear power outlet can be switched to“battery” powered all the time by switchingthe power outlet right rear quarter panel fusein the fuse panel.

Center Console Outlet

Rear Power Outlet

Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Con-sole Bin2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power OutletRight Rear Quarter Panel3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru-ment Panel

133


WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:• Only devices designed for use in this type

of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Voltoutlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.• Close the lid when not in use and while

driving the vehicle.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged indraw power from the vehicle’s battery,even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough,the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-ciently to degrade battery life and/or pre-vent the engine from starting.

(Continued)


• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) willdegrade the battery even more quickly.Only use these intermittently and withgreater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories,or long periods of the vehicle not beingstarted (with accessories still plugged in), thevehicle must be driven a sufficient length oftime to allow the generator to recharge thevehicle’s battery.

CUPHOLDERSThere are two cupholders for the front seatpassengers located in the center console.

There are two cupholders for the rear seatpassengers located in the fold-down centerarmrest.

Front Cupholders

134


STORAGE

Glove CompartmentThe glove compartment is located on the rightside of the instrument panel.

To open the glove compartment, pull outwardon the latch and lower the glove box door.

Door StorageLarge storage areas are built into the doorpanels for easy access.

Rear Cupholders Glove Compartment

Opened Glove Compartment

Door Panel Storage

135


Console FeaturesThe center console contains both an upper anda lower storage area.

To open the upper storage compartment, pullupward on the small latch located on the lid.

Lift upward on the larger of the latches toaccess the lower storage compartment.

Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVDplayer located in the center console.

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a consolecompartment lid in the open position. Cellularphones, music players, and other handheldelectronic devices should be stowed whiledriving. Use of these devices while driving cancause an accident due to distraction, resultingin death or injury.

Storage Compartment

Storage Compartment Latches

Lower Storage Compartment

Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player-IfEquipped

136


CARGO AREA FEATURES

Rechargeable FlashlightThe rechargeable flashlight is mounted on theleft side of the cargo area. The flashlight snapsout of the bezel when needed. The flashlightfeatures two bright LED light bulbs and is pow-ered by rechargeable lithium batteries that re-charge when snapped back into place.

Press in on the flashlight to release it.

To operate the flashlight, press the switch oncefor high, twice for low, and a third time to returnto off.

Cargo Storage BinsThere are four removable storage bins locatedin the rear cargo area. There are two storagebins located on either side of the cargo area.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with a rear sub-woofer, the passenger side cargo area willnot be available.

Press And Release

Three-Press Switch

Rear Storage Bin

137


Two additional storage bins are located underthe load floor. To access the lower storage bins,raise the load floor and attach the tether hook(attached to the bottom of the load floor) to theliftgate opening.

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — IfEquippedNOTE:The purpose of this cover is for privacy, notto secure loads. It will not prevent cargofrom shifting or protect passengers fromloose cargo.To cover the cargo area:

1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull itover the cargo area.

2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover intothe slots in the pillar trim cover.

3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargocover in place.

WARNING!

In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehiclecould cause injury. It could fly around in asudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo flooror in the passenger compartment. Remove thecover from the vehicle when taken from itsmounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.

Tether Strap

Lower Storage Bins

Rear Cargo Cover

138


Rear Cargo Tie-DownsThe rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargoarea floor, should be used to safely secureloads when the vehicle is moving.

WARNING!

• To help protect against personal injury,passengers should not be seated in therear cargo area. The rear cargo space isintended for load carrying purposes only,not for passengers, who should sit in seatsand use seat belts.

• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe an-chors for a child seat tether strap. In asudden stop or accident, a hook could pullloose and allow the child seat to comeloose. A child could be badly injured. Useonly the anchors provided for child seattethers.

The weight and position of cargo and pas-sengers can change the vehicle center ofgravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of

(Continued)


control resulting in personal injury, followthese guidelines for loading your vehicle:• Do not carry loads which exceed the load

limits described on the label attached tothe left door or left door center pillar.

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargofloor. Put heavier objects as low and as farforward as possible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front ofthe rear axle. Too much weight or improp-erly placed weight over or behind the rearaxle can cause the rear of the vehicle tosway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher thanthe top of the seatback. This could impairvisibility or become a dangerous projectilein a sudden stop or accident.

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

139


REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper/washer controls are located onthe multifunction lever on the left side of thesteering column. The rear wiper/washer is op-erated by rotating a switch, located at themiddle of the lever.

Rotate the center portion of the leverupward to the first detent for intermit-tent operation and to the second de-

tent for continuous rear wiper operation.

Rotating the center portion upwardonce more will activate the washerpump which will continue to operate aslong as the switch is held. Upon re-

lease of the switch, the wipers will resume thecontinuous rear wiper operation. When thisrotary control is in the OFF position, rotating itdownward will activate the rear washer pumpwhich will continue to operate as long as theswitch is held. Once the switch is released it willreturn to the OFF position and the wipers willcycle several times before returning to theparked position.

NOTE:As a protective measure, the pump will stopif the switch is held for more than 20 sec-onds. Once the switch is released the pumpwill resume normal operation.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition isturned OFF, the wiper will automatically returnto the “park” position.

If the flipper glass is open, the rear windowwiper/washer functionality is interrupted and thewiper stops at that “park” position. When theflipper glass is closed, the rear wiper will re-sume wiper/washer functionality after five sec-onds.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button islocated on the climate control panel.Press this button to turn on the rearwindow defroster and the heated out-

side mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in thebutton will illuminate when the rear windowdefroster is on. The rear window defroster au-tomatically turns off after approximately 10 min-utes. For an additional five minutes of opera-tion, press the button a second time.

NOTE:To prevent excessive battery drain, use therear window defroster only when the engineis operating.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

140


CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive windowcleaners on the interior surface of thewindow. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash-ing solution, wiping parallel to the heatingelements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, orabrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from thewindow.

141


142


4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . .152

• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . .153• Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Messages . . . . .155• EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156• EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157• EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158• EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158• Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

• Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163• Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164• Soft-Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0

Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

143


• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

• SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188• Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190• iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190• STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .190

• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190• CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

• General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192• Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

144


INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 6 — Lower Switch Bank 11 — Hood Release2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Hazard Switch 12 — Fuel Door Release3 — Radio 8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub) 13 — Headlight Switch4 — Glove Compartment 9 — ESC Button 14 — Dimmer Control5 — Climate Controls 10 — Ignition Switch

145


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

146


INSTRUMENT CLUSTERDESCRIPTIONS1. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions perminute (RPM x 1000).

2. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turnedto the ON/RUN position, this light willturn on for four to eight seconds as abulb check. During the bulb check, if

the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime willsound. After the bulb check or when driving, ifthe driver or front passenger seat belt remainsunbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light willflash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Oc-cupant Restraints” in “Things To Know BeforeStarting Your Vehicle” for further information.

3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS). The light willturn on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON/RUN position andmay stay on for as long as fourseconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on whiledriving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion ofthe brake system is not functioning and thatservice is required. However, the conventionalbrake system will continue to operate normally ifthe BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system shouldbe serviced as soon as possible to restore thebenefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS lightdoes not turn on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON/RUN position, have the lightinspected by an authorized dealer.

4. High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on highbeam.

5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when thefront fog lights are on.

6. Selectable EVIC Information

This area of the cluster will display selectableinformation such as compass, outside tempera-ture, etc. For further information, refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — IfEquipped” of your owners manual for moreinformation.

7. Turn Signal Indicator

The arrows will flash with the exteriorturn signals when the turn signal leveris operated. A tone will chime, and an

EVIC message will appear if either turn signal isleft on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTE:If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate,check for a defective outside light bulb.

147


8. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed. >

NOTE:

9. Selectable EVIC Information

This area of the cluster will display selectableinformation such as compass, outside tempera-ture, etc. For further information, refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — IfEquipped” of your owners manual for moreinformation.

10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)is part of an onboard diagnostic sys-tem called OBD II that monitors en-gine and automatic transmission con-

trol systems. The light will illuminate when thekey is in the ON/RUN position before enginestart. If the bulb does not come on when turningthe key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi-tion checked promptly.

Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., mayilluminate the light after engine start. The ve-hicle should be serviced if the light stays on

through several of your typical driving cycles. Inmost situations, the vehicle will drive normallyand will not require towing.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage tothe engine control system. It also could affectfuel economy and drivability. If the MIL isflashing, severe catalytic converter damageand power loss will soon occur. Immediateservice is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref-erenced above, can reach higher tempera-tures than in normal operating conditions.This can cause a fire if you drive slowly orpark over flammable substances such as dryplants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re-sult in death or serious injury to the driver,occupants or others.

11. Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator— If Equipped

This light indicates the ElectronicParking Brake system requiresservice.

12. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolanttemperature. Any reading within the normalrange indicates that the engine cooling systemis operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a highertemperature when driving in hot weather, upmountain grades, or when towing a trailer. Itshould not be allowed to exceed the upper limitsof the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling systemcould damage your vehicle. If the tempera-ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the

(Continued)

148



vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-tioner turned off until the pointer drops backinto the normal range. If the pointer remainson the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,turn the engine off immediately and call anauthorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.You or others could be badly burned bysteam or boiling coolant. You may want tocall an authorized dealer for service if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look un-der the hood yourself, see “Maintaining YourVehicle”. Follow the warnings under theCooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

13. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake func-tions, including brake fluid level andparking brake application. If the brake

light turns on it may indicate that the parkingbrake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low,or that there is a problem with the anti-lockbrake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brakehas been disengaged, and the fluid level is atthe full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, itindicates a possible brake hydraulic systemmalfunction or that a problem with the BrakeBooster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light willremain on until the condition has been cor-rected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reservebraking capacity in the event of a failure to aportion of the hydraulic system. A leak in eitherhalf of the dual brake system is indicated by theBrake Warning Light, which will turn on whenthe brake fluid level in the master cylinder hasdropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause iscorrected.

NOTE:The light may flash momentarily duringsharp cornering maneuvers, which changefluid level conditions. The vehicle shouldhave service performed, and the brake fluidlevel checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair isnecessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system mayhave failed. It will take longer to stop thevehicle. You could have a collision. Have thevehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), are also equipped with Elec-tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In theevent of an EBD failure, the Brake WarningLight will turn on along with the ABS Light.Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

149


Operation of the Brake Warning Light can bechecked by turning the ignition switch from theOFF position to the ON/RUN position. The lightshould illuminate for approximately two sec-onds. The light should then turn off unless theparking brake is applied or a brake fault isdetected. If the light does not illuminate, havethe light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch in theON/RUN position.

NOTE:This light shows only that the parking brakeis applied. It does not show the degree ofbrake application.

14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder

The fuel pump symbol points to the side of thevehicle where the fuel door is located. Thepointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tankwhen the ignition switch is in the ON/RUNposition.

15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the infla-tion pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the propertire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detectsa malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continu-ously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

150


telltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-sures and warning have been established forthe tire size equipped on your vehicle. Un-desirable system operation or sensor dam-age may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size, type,and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant froma can or balance beads if your vehicle isequipped with a TPMS, as damage to thesensors may result.

16. Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) Display/Odometer Display

The odometer display shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis-play shows the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) messages. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center” of your ownersmanual for more information.

17. Selectable EVIC Menu

This area of the cluster will display the EVICselectable menu. For further information, referto “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)— If Equipped” of your owners manual for moreinformation.

18. Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four toeight seconds as a bulb checkwhen the ignition switch is firstturned to the ON/RUN position. Ifthe light is either not on during

starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, havethe system inspected at an authorized dealer assoon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Re-straints” in “Things To Know Before StartingYour Vehicle” of your owners manual for furtherinformation.

19. Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for ap-proximately 15 seconds when thevehicle theft alarm is arming. Thelight will flash at a slower speedcontinuously after the alarm is set.

The security light will also come on for about threeseconds when the ignition is first turned on.

20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFFIndicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the ElectronicStability Control (ESC) is off.

21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light — IfEquipped

The “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” in the instrumentcluster will come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with

151


the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-ously with the engine running, a malfunctionhas been detected in the ESC system. If thislight remains on after several ignition cycles,and the vehicle has been driven several miles(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soonas possible to have the problem diagnosed andcorrected.

NOTE:

The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comeon momentarily each time the ignition switchis turned to ON/RUN.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,the ESC system will be ON, even if it wasturned off previously.

The ESC system will make buzzing or click-ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;the sounds will stop when ESC becomesinactive following the maneuver that causedthe ESC activation.

22. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate whenthe park lights or headlights areturned on.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLEINFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)The Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) features a driver-interactive display thatis located in the instrument cluster.

This system allows the driver to select a varietyof useful information by pressing the switchesmounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC con-sists of the following:

• Main Gauge

• MPH to km/h

• Vehicle Info

• Terrain — If Equipped

• Performance

• Driver Assist

• Fuel Economy

• Trip

• Audio

• Stored Messages

• Screen Setup

• Speed Warning

• Diagnostic Codes

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Location

152


The system allows the driver to select informa-tion by pressing the following buttons mountedon the steering wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Press and release the UP arrow but-ton to scroll upward through the mainmenu and submenus (Main Gauge,MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain,Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip A,

Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).

• DOWN Arrow Button

Press and release the DOWN arrowbutton to scroll downward through themain menu and submenus (MainGauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Ter-rain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,

Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen SetUp).

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Press and release the RIGHT ar-row button to access the informa-tion screens or sub-menu screensof a main menu item.

• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button

Press and release the LEFT arrowbutton to access the informationscreens or sub-menu screens of amain menu item.

• OK Button

Press the OK button to access/select the infor-mation screens or sub-menu screens of a mainmenu item. Press and hold the OK arrow buttonfor two seconds to reset displayed/selectedfeatures that can be reset.

Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) DisplaysThe EVIC displays are located in the centerportion of the cluster and consists of eightsections:

1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the displaywill illuminate in grey under normal conditions,yellow for non critical warnings, red for criticalwarnings and white for on demand information.

2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menuInformation — Whenever there are sub-menusavailable, the position within the sub-menus isshown here.

3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information

4. Telltales/Indicators

5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)

EVIC Buttons

153


6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp,Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)

7. 4WD Status

8. Selectable Gauge 2

9. Selectable Gauge 1

The main display area will normally display themain menu or the screens of a selected featureof the main menu. The main display area alsodisplays “pop up” messages that consist ofapproximately 60 possible warning or informa-tion messages. These pop up messages fallinto several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, thistype of message takes control of the maindisplay area for five seconds and then returns tothe previous screen. Most of the messages ofthis type are then stored (as long as the condi-tion that activated it remains active) and can bereviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.As long as there is a stored message, an “i” willbe displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside

temp line. Examples of this message type are“Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “LowTire Pressure”.

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayed indefinitely oruntil the condition that activated the message iscleared. Examples of this message type are“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and“Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

These messages deal primarily with the Re-mote Start feature. This message type is dis-played until the ignition is in the RUN state.Examples of this message type are “RemoteStart Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press BrakePedal and Push Button to Start”.

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, thistype of message takes control of the maindisplay area for five seconds and then returns tothe previous screen. An example of this mes-sage type is “Automatic High Beams On”.

Engine Oil Change Indicator SystemOil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oilchange indicator system. The “Oil Change Re-quired” message will flash in the EVIC displayfor approximately 10 seconds after a singlechime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-uled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty cycle based, whichmeans the engine oil change interval may fluc-tuate, dependent upon your personal drivingstyle.

Unless reset, this message will continue todisplay each time you turn the ignition switch tothe ON/RUN position or cycle the ignition to theON/RUN position if equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™. To turn off the message tempo-rarily, press and release the MENU button. Toreset the oil change indicator system (afterperforming the scheduled maintenance) refer tothe following procedure.

154


Vehicles Equipped With KeylessEnter-N-Go™

1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press theENGINE START/STOP button and cycle theignition to the ON/ RUN position (Do not startthe engine.)

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly,three times within 10 seconds.

3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press theENGINE START/STOP button once to returnthe ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:If the indicator message illuminates whenyou start the vehicle, the oil change indica-tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeatthis procedure.

Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) Messages• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Service Airbag System

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “In-flate Tire to XX”

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Key in Ignition

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Key to Run

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light

155


• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Tailgate Open

• Gear Not Available

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick ServiceReq.

• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait toCool

• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On

• Washer Fluid Low

• Fuel Saved Gal

• Fuel Saved LThe Reconfigurable Telltales section is dividedinto the white telltales area on the right, ambertelltales in the middle, and red telltales on theleft.

EVIC Amber TelltalesThis area will show reconfigurable amber cau-tion telltales. These telltales include:

• Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approxi-mately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turnon, and remain on until fuel is added.

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicatethe windshield washer fluid is low.

• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale

This telltale indicates that thetransmission fluid temperature isrunning hot. This may occur withsevere usage, such as trailer tow-ing. If this telltale turns on, safely

pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift thetransmission into NEUTRAL and run the engineat idle or faster until the light turns off.

• Service Forward Collision Warming

This light warns the driver of a potential collisionwith the vehicle in front and prompts the driverto take action in order to avoid the collision. Forfurther information, refer to “Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC)” in “Understanding The FeaturesOf Your Vehicle.”

• Service Adaptive Cruise Control

This light will turn on when a ACCis not operating and needs service.For further information, refer to“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in“Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle.”

156


• Electronic Park Brake Failure

This telltale indicates that there isan Electronic Park Brake Fault.Please see your authorized dealerfor assistance.

EVIC Red TelltalesThis area will show reconfigurable red telltales.These telltales include:

• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicatethat one or more doors may beajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This telltale indicates low engine oilpressure. If the light turns on while

driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engineas soon as possible. A chime will sound for fourminutes when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause iscorrected. This light does not show how muchoil is in the engine. The engine oil level must bechecked under the hood.

• Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil tem-perature is high. If the light turns onwhile driving, stop the vehicle andshut off the engine as soon aspossible.

• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the elec-trical charging system. If the light stayson or comes on while driving, turn off

some of the vehicle’s non-essential electricaldevices or increase engine speed (if at idle). Ifthe charging system light remains on, it meansthat the vehicle is experiencing a problem withthe charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMME-DIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump StartingProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problemwith the Electronic Throttle Control(ETC) system. The light will comeon when the ignition is first turnedON and remain on briefly as a bulb

check. If the light does not come on duringstarting, have the system checked by an autho-rized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come onwhile the engine is running. Cycle the ignitionkey when the vehicle has completely stoppedand the shift lever is placed in the PARK posi-tion. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, yourvehicle will usually be drivable. However, see anauthorized dealer for service as soon as possible.If the light is flashing when the engine is running,immediate service is required. You may experi-ence reduced performance, an elevated/roughidle or engine stall and your vehicle may requiretowing.

157


• Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated en-gine condition. As temperatures riseand the gauge approaches H, this in-

dicator will illuminate and a single chime willsound after reaching a set threshold. Furtheroverheating will cause the temperature gaugeto pass H, the indicator will continuously flashand a continuous chime will occur until theengine is allowed to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull overand stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEU-TRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperaturereading does not return to normal, turn theengine off immediately and call for service.Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for more information.

• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – IfEquipped

This telltale is on when the ElectricPower Steering is not operatingand needs service.

• Liftgate Ajar

This light will turn on to indicatethat liftgate may be ajar.

EVIC Green Telltales• Electronic Speed Control SET

This telltale will illuminate greenwhen the electronic speed controlis SET. For further information, re-fer to “Electronic Speed Control” in“Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle.”

EVIC Selectable Menu ItemsPress and release the UP or DOWN arrowbuttons until the desired Selectable Menu iconis highlighted in the EVIC.

Digital Speedometer

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Digital displayicon is highlighted in the EVIC. Pressand release the RIGHT arrow buttonto scroll through the sub-menus andpress the OK button to change the

display between km/h and mph.

Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Vehicle Infoicon is highlighted in the EVIC.Press and release the RIGHT arrowbutton and Coolant Temp will bedisplayed. Press the LEFT or RIGHT

158


arrow button to scroll through the informationsub-menus and press the OK button to select orreset the following resettable sub-menus:

Transmission Temperature – AutomaticTransmission Only

Oil Temp

Oil Life

Multimeter

Engine Hours

Tire Pressure

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrowbutton until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrowbutton and one of the following will be dis-played:

If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICONis displayed with tire pressure values in eachcorner of the ICON.

If one or more tires have low pressure, “InflateTire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICONand the tire pressure values in each corner of

the ICON with the pressure value of the low tiredisplayed in a different color than the other tirepressure value.

If the Tire Pressure system requires service,“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function andcannot be reset. Press and release the LEFTarrow button to return to the main menu.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” under “Starting and Operating” forfurther information.

Trip A

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Trip A icon ishighlighted in the EVIC (Toggle leftor right to select Trip A or Trip B). TheTrip A information will display thefollowing:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset all the information.

Trip B

Press and release the Left or Rightarrow button until the Trip B icon ishighlighted in the EVIC (Toggle leftor right to select Trip A or Trip B).The Trip B information will displaythe following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset all the information.

Fuel Economy

Press and release the UP orDOWN arrow button until the FuelEconomy icon is highlighted.

• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon(MPG or L/100 km with Bargraph)

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

159


Stored Messages

Press and release the UP arrowbutton until the Messages displayicon is highlighted in the EVIC. Thisfeature shows the number of storedwarning messages. Pressing theRIGHT arrow button will allow you to

see what the stored messages are.

Audio

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Audio displayicon is highlighted in the EVIC.Press and release the RIGHT arrowbutton to scroll through the sub-menus and press the OK button

display the active source.

SRT

WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the per-formance pages is intended for off-highway oroff-road use only and should not be done onany public roadways. It is recommended thatthese features be used in a controlled environ-ment and within the limits of the law. Thecapabilities of the vehicle as measured by theperformance pages must never be exploited ina reckless or dangerous manner which canjeopardize the users safety or the safety ofothers. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful drivercan prevent accidents.

The Performance Features include the follow-ing:

• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

• Braking Distance

• 1/8 Mile

• 1/4 Mile

• Instantaneous G-Force

• Peak G-Force

• Launch Mode – If Equipped

To access, press and release either the UP orDOWN arrow button until “SRT” appears in theEVIC, then press and release the RIGHT arrowbutton to cycle through the features. Press theOK button to select a feature.

The following describes each feature and itsoperation:

Timers

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

When selected, this screen displays the time ittakes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph(0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.

• The feature will “ready” when the vehiclespeed is at 0 mph (0 km/h). The word“READY” will appear when conditions aremet for the event to begin.

160


• The screen will revert back to “Please cometo a complete stop, Not Ready”, if the vehiclefails to reach 60 mph (100 km/h) in less then10 seconds.

• The time will continue to display until the OKbutton is pressed or the vehicles is brought toa stop.

Braking Distance

When selected, this screen displays the vehi-cle’s braking distance and the speed at whichthe brake pedal was depressed.

• This feature will only function when applying thebrakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Engaging the parking brake will disable thisfeature.

• The word “READY” will display when condi-tions are met for the event to begin.

• The distance and speed measurements dis-play while the event is taking place.

• The distance measurement will be aborted ifthe brake pedal is released before the ve-hicle comes to a complete stop.

• The distance and speed measurements willcontinue to display until the conditions aremet for another event to be recorded.

• Pressing the OK button will clear the current runand prepare the cluster to record a new run.

1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile

When selected, this screen displays the time ittakes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile)within 25 seconds.

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” willdisplay when conditions are met for the eventto begin.

• 0.0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 25 seconds.

• The time will continue to display until thevehicle is brought to a stop.

Instantaneous G-Force

When selected, this screen displays the currentG-Force (lateral and longitudinal).

Peak G-Force

When selected, this screen displays all fourG-Force values (two lateral and two longitudi-nal).

• When a force greater than zero is measured,the display will update the value as it climbs.As the G-Force falls, the peak forces willcontinue to display.

• Pressing and holding the OK button for fiveseconds will clear the peak force values.

Launch Mode – If Equipped

This system maximizes acceleration traction forstraight line racing.

1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a leveltrack surface with the engine running.

2. Set the steering wheel for straight aheaddriving.

3. Fully press the brake pedal.

4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button.

5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

161


NOTE:If the cluster launch EVIC message indicatesall conditions are correct for launch and thethrottle is pressed to the floor quickly(within approximately 1/2 second) the sys-tem will hold the engine speed to a presetspeed (below the engine rev limiter speed).

6. Release the brake pedal.

Pressing the launch control button when launchcontrol is active will deactivate launch control.

NOTE:

• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimumRPM and waits for the driver to release thebrake. Launch Mode then uses enginethrottle only to achieve controlled wheelslipfor maximum acceleration through first gear.

• Launch Mode can be initiated in any of theSelect Trac Modes.

• Launch Mode is not available until the500 mile break-in has been achieved.

Screen Setup

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Screen Setupdisplay icon is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release the RIGHTarrow button to enter the ScreenSetup sub-menu. The Screen Setup

feature allows you to change what information isdisplayed in the instrument cluster as well as thelocation that information is displayed.

Driver Assist

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Driver Assistdisplay icon is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release the RIGHTarrow button to display the AdaptiveCruise Control sub-menu. For fur-

ther information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle”.

TerrainPress and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttonuntil the Terrain display icon is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow buttonto display the Selec-Tract, Drivetrain.

Diagnostics — If Equipped

Press and release the UP or DOWNarrow button until the Diagnostics dis-play icon is highlighted in the EVIC.Press and release the RIGHT arrowbutton to display the diagnostictrouble codes and descriptions.

Screen Setup Driver Selectable ItemsOdometer

• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator

• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator

Upper Left

• None

• Compass

162


• Outside Temp (default setting)

• Current Gear: ON/OFF

• Current Gear

• Gear Display

• Time


• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

Upper Right

• None

• Compass (default setting)

• Outside Temp

• Time


• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

Restore To Defaults (Restores All SettingsTo Default Settings)

• Cancel

• Okay

Uconnect® SETTINGSThe Uconnect® system uses a combination ofsoft and hard keys located on the center of theinstrument panel that allows you to access andchange the customer programmable features.

Uconnect® 5.0 soft-keys and hard-keys

1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys

163


Hard-KeysHard-Keys are located below the Uconnect®Access system in the center of the instrumentpanel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter controlknob located on the right side of the ClimateControls in the center of the instrument panel.Turn the control knob to scroll through menusand change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press thecenter of the control knob one or more times toselect or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect® Access system may also havea Screen Off and Back hard-keys located belowthe system.

Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off theUconnect® Access screen. Press the Screen Offhard-key a second time to turn the screen on.

Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu orcertain option on the Uconnect® Access system.

Soft-KeysSoft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect®display.

Customer Programmable Features— Uconnect® 5.0 SettingsPress the Settings hard-key to display the menusetting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® systemallows you to access programmable features thatmay be equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Com-fort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Com-pass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth.

NOTE:Only one touchscreen area may be selectedat a time.

When making a selection, press the soft-key toenter the desired mode. Once in the desiredmode press and release the preferred settinguntil a check-mark appears next to the setting,showing that setting has been selected. Oncethe setting is complete either press the BackArrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return tothe previous menu or press the X soft-key toclose out of the settings screen. Pressing theUp or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side ofthe screen will allow you to toggle up or downthrough the available settings.

DisplayAfter pressing the Display soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select the Auto orManual display settings. To change Mode sta-tus, touch and release the Auto or Manualsoft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the overallscreen brightness with the headlights on. Adjustthe brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys

Uconnect® 8.4 soft-keys and hard-keys

1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys

164


or by selecting any point on the scale betweenthe + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrowback soft-key.

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the overallscreen brightness with the headlights off. Adjustthe brightness with the + and – setting soft-keysor by selecting any point on the scale betweenthe + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrowback soft-key.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiplelanguages (Deutsche / English / Español / Français/ Italiano / Nederlands / Polski / Português / Türkçe)for all display nomenclature, including the trip func-tions and the navigation system (if equipped).Touch the Set Language soft-key, then touch thedesired language soft-key until a check-mark ap-pears next to the language, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu.

• Units

When in this display, you may select to have theEVIC, odometer, and navigation system (ifequipped) changed between US and Metricunits of measure. Touch US or Metric until acheck-mark appears next to the setting, show-ing that setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the VoiceResponse Length settings. To change the VoiceResponse Length, touch the Brief or Detailedsoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may choose to Never /w/Help or Always display the Teleprompter withpossible options while in a voice session. Tochange the Show Command List, touch the Never

/ w/Help or Always soft-key until a check-markappears next to the setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut offthe sound heard when a touch screen button(soft-key) is pressed. Touch the TouchscreenBeep soft-key until a check-mark appears nextto the setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turndirections will appear in the display as thevehicle approaches a designated turn within aprogrammed route. To make your selection,touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Clustersoft-key, until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

165


ClockAfter pressing the Clock soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Time and Format

When in this display, you may set the time andchoose the format to display the time. Touch the12h / 24h / AM and/or PM soft-key until acheck-mark appears next to the setting, show-ing that setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu. If 24h is selected, AM/PM soft-keys willbe greyed out (unavailable).

• Sync Date

When in this display, you may choose to set thedate automatically. Touch the Sync Date soft-key until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Set Date

When in this display, you may set the datemanually. Touch the Set Date soft-key until acheck-mark appears next to the setting, show-

ing that setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

Safety / AssistanceAfter pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Front Collision Sensitivity- If Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature pro-vides an audible and/or visual warning to poten-tial forward collisions. The feature can be canbe set to Far, or set to Near. The default statusof FCW is the Far setting. This means thesystem will warn you of a possible collision withthe vehicle in front of you when you are fartheraway. This gives you the most reaction time. Tochange the setting for more dynamic driving,select the Near setting. This warns you of apossible collision when you are much closer tothe vehicle in front of you. To change the FCWstatus, touch and release the Near or Farbutton. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

For further information, refer to “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle”.

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) -Active Braking

The FCW system includes Advanced BrakeAssist (ABA). When this feature is selected, theABA applies additional brake pressure when thedriver requests insufficient brake pressure toavoid a potential frontal collision. The ABAsystem becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). Tomake your selection, touch the Forward Colli-sion Warning (FCW) with Mitigation - ActiveBraking soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hadbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu. For further infor-mation, refer to “Forward Collision Warning(FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle

• ParkSense®

The ParkSense® system will scan for objectsbehind the vehicle when the transmission shiftlever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed isless than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide analert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the prox-imity to other objects. The system can be en-abled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.

166


To change the ParkSense® status, touch andrelease the Sound Only or Sounds and Displaybutton. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for system functionand operating information.

• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume

The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settingscan be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®System — if equipped. The chime volume set-tings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. Thefactory default volume setting is MEDIUM. Tomake your selection, touch the ParkSense®Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that thesetting had been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.ParkSense® will retain its last known configu-ration state through ignition cycles.

• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume

The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settingscan be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®System — if equipped. The chime volume set-tings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The

factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. Tomake your selection, touch the ParkSense® RearChime Volume soft-key, until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, indicating that the settinghad been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu. ParkSense® willretain its last known configuration state throughignition cycles.

• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking

When this feature is selected, the park assistsystem will detect objects located behind thevehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stopthe vehicle. To make your selection, touch theParkSense® Park Assist Braking soft-key, untila check-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting had been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist”in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-hicle” for system function and operatinginformation.

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — IfEquipped

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets thedistance at which the steering wheel will providefeedback for potential lane departures. TheLDW sensitivity can be set to provide either anearly, medium or late warning zone start point.To make your selection, touch the Lane Depar-ture Warning soft-key, until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, indicating that the settinghad been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)Strength — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets thestrength of the steering wheel feedback forpotential lane departures. The amount of direc-tional torque the steering system can apply tothe steering wheel to correct for vehicle lanedeparture can be set at Low, Medium or High.To make your selection, touch the Lane Depar-ture Warning soft-key until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, indicating that the settinghad been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

167


• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse

When this feature is selected, the exteriorsideview mirrors will tilt downward when theignition is in the RUN position and the transmis-sion shift lever is in the REVERSE position. Themirrors will move back to their previous positionwhen the transmission is shifted out of RE-VERSE. To make your selection, touch the TiltMirrors In Reverse soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting had been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Paddle Shifting

Selecting this feature enables the use of steer-ing wheel paddle switches for shifting in manualmode. To make your selection, touch the PaddleShifting soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hadbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Blind Spot Alert

When this feature is selected, the Blind SpotAlert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or au-dible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The

Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in“Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, theBlind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activatedand will only show a visual alert in the exteriormirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is acti-vated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show avisual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as anaudible alert when the turn signal is on. When“Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)system is deactivated. To change the Blind SpotAlert status, touch the Off, Lights or Lights &Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

NOTE:If your vehicle has experienced any damagein the area where the sensor is located, evenif the fascia is not damaged, the sensor mayhave become misaligned. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer to verify sensoralignment. Having a sensor that is mis-aligned will result in the BSM not operatingto specification.

• ParkView® Backup Camera

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allowsyou to see an on-screen image of the rearsurroundings of your vehicle whenever the shiftlever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen displayalong with a caution note to “check entire sur-roundings” across the top of the screen. Afterfive seconds, this note will disappear. TheParkView® camera is located on the rear of thevehicle above the rear License plate. To makeyour selection, touch the ParkView® BackupCamera soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hadbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera ActiveGuidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera ActiveGuidelines that allows you to see active guide-lines over the ParkView Back up camera displaywhenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.

168


The image will be displayed on the radio touch-screen display along with a caution note to“check entire surroundings” across the top ofthe screen. After five seconds, this note willdisappear. To make your selection, touch theParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelinessoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Static Guide-lines that allows you to see straight grid lineoverlay over the ParkView Back up camera dis-play whenever the shift lever is put into RE-VERSE. The image will be displayed on the radiotouchscreen display along with a caution note to“check entire surroundings” across the top of thescreen. After five seconds, this note will disap-pear. To make your selection, touch theParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,indicating that the setting had been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide-lines

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera FixedGuidelines that allows you to see Fixed Guide-lines over the ParkView Back up Camera dis-play whenever the shift lever is put into RE-VERSE. The image will be displayed on theradio touchscreen display along with a cautionnote to “check entire surroundings” across thetop of the screen. After five seconds, this notewill disappear. To make your selection, touchthe ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide-lines soft-key, until a check-mark appears nextto setting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE(with camera delay turned OFF), the rear cam-era mode is exited and the navigation or audioscreen appears again. When the vehicle isshifted out of REVERSE (with camera delayturned ON), the rear view image with dynamicgrid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds

after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless theforward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFFposition. To set the ParkView® Backup CameraDelay press the “Controls” soft-key, the “set-tings” soft-key, then the “Safety & Driving Assis-tance” soft-key. Press the “Parkview Backupcamera Delay” soft-key to turn the ParkView®Delay ON or OFF.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system willautomatically activate the windshield wipers if itsenses moisture on the windshield. To makeyour selection, touch the Rain Sensing soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to setting,indicating that the setting had been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill StartAssist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Elec-tronic Brake Control System” in “Starting AndOperating” for system function and operating

169


information. To make your selection, touch theHill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting had been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Brake Service

This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is inmotion. When this feature is selected, it willallow the service of the rear brake components.To make your selection touch the Brake Servicesoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Auto Park Brake (automatic vehicles)

When this feature is selected, the vehicle willautomatically set the Park Brake when thevehicle is shifted to park. To make your selec-tion, touch the Auto Park Brake soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting had been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Auto Park Brake (manual vehicles)

When this feature is selected, the vehicle willautomatically set the Park Brake at key off. Tomake your selection, touch the Auto Park Brakesoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Hold ’n Go

When this feature is selected, the vehicle willautomatically hold its position when it comes toa stop To make your selection, touch the Hold ’nGo soft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

LightsAfter pressing the Lights soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Interior Ambient Lights

When this feature is selected, it allows theadjustment of the brightness of the interiorambient lighting. To change the Interior Ambient

Lights setting, touch the + or - soft-key to selectyour desired Interior Ambient Light level. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlights Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows theadjustment of the amount of time the headlightsremain on after the engine is shut off. To changethe Headlights Off Delay setting, touch theHeadlights Off Delay soft-key, and choose ei-ther 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Acheck-mark appears next to setting indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights willactivate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 sec-onds when the doors are unlocked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Tochange the Illuminated Approach status, touchthe + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

170


• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlightswitch is in the AUTO position, the headlightswill turn on approximately 10 seconds after thewipers are turned on. The headlights will alsoturn off when the wipers are turned off if theywere turned on by this feature. To make yourselection, touch the Headlights With Wiperssoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the high beamheadlights will activate/deactivate automaticallyunder certain conditions. To make your selec-tion, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — IfEquipped” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights willturn on whenever the engine is running. Tomake your selection, touch the Daytime Run-ning Lights soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Adaptive Front Lighting

When this feature is selected, the headlights willturn relative to a change in the direction of thesteering wheel. To make your selection, touchthe Adaptive Front Lighting soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlight Dip

Select this feature when driving on the oppositeside of road to lower headlights. To make yourselection, touch the Headlight Dip soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Flash Headlights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the headlights willflash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-ter. This feature may be selected with or withoutthe sound horn on lock feature selected. Tomake your selection, touch the Flash Head-lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

Doors & LocksAfter pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlockwhen the vehicle is stopped and the transmissionis in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and thedriver’s door is opened. To make your selection,touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, showing thatsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

171


• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn willsound when the door locks are activated. Tomake your selection, touch the Sound HornWith Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn willsound when the remote start is activated. Tomake your selection, touch the Sound HornWith Remote Start soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is se-lected, only the driver’s door will unlock on thefirst press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st Press Of

Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must pressthe RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice tounlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock AllDoors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doorswill unlock on the first press of the RKE trans-mitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE:If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock nomatter which Passive Entry equipped doorhandle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key FobUnlocks is programmed, only the driver’sdoor will unlock when the driver’s door isgrasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks is programmed, touchingthe handle more than once will only result inthe driver’s door opening. If driver door firstis selected, once the driver door is opened,the interior door lock/unlock switch can beused to unlock all doors (or use RKE trans-mitter).

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock thevehicle’s door(s) without having to press theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock orunlock buttons. It automatically unlocks thedoors when the outside door handle is grabbed.To make your selection, touch the Passive Entrysoft-key until a check-mark appears next tosetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting YourVehicle” for further information.

• Memory To FOB — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat po-sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-ing and exiting the vehicle. To make your selec-tion, touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

172


NOTE:The seat will return to the memorized seatlocation (if Recall Memory with Remote KeyUnlock is set to ON) when the Remote Key-less Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to un-lock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”in “Understanding The Features Of YourVehicle” for further information.

• Power Lift Gate Alert

This feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your selec-tion, touch the Power Lift Gate Alert soft-keyuntil a check-mark appears next to setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

Auto-On Comfort & Remote StartAfter pressing the Auto-On Comfort & RemoteStart soft-key the following settings will be avail-able.

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected the driver’sheated seat and heated steering wheel willautomatically turn ON when temperatures arebelow 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures areabove 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat willturn ON. To make your selection, touch the AutoHeated Seats soft-key, then select either Off,Remote Start or All Starts until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

Engine Off OptionsAfter pressing the Engine Off Options soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power win-dow switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),power sunroof (if equipped), and power outletswill remain active for up to 10 minutes after theignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front

door will cancel this feature. To change theEngine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 sec-onds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutessoft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver canchoose to have the headlights remain on for 0,30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.To change the Headlight Off Delay status touchthe + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

Compass Setting – If EquippedAfter pressing the Compass Settings soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference betweenMagnetic North and Geographic North. To com-pensate for the differences the variance shouldbe set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,per the zone map. Once properly set, the com-pass will automatically compensate for the dif-ferences, and provide the most accurate com-pass heading.

173


NOTE:Keep magnetic materials away from the topof the instrument panel, such as iPod’s,Mobile Phones, Laptop Computers and Ra-dar Detectors. This is where the compassmodule is located, and it can cause interfer-ence with the compass sensor, and it maygive false readings.

• Perform Compass Calibration

Touch the Calibration soft-key to change thissetting. This compass is self-calibrating, whicheliminates the need to manually reset the com-pass. When the vehicle is new, the compassmay appear erratic and the EVIC will display

CAL until the compass is calibrated. You maycalibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and completing one or more 360-degreeturns (in an area free from large metal ormetallic objects) until the CAL indicator dis-played in the EVIC turns off. The compass willnow function normally.

AudioAfter pressing the Audio soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Balance/Fade

When in this display you may adjust the Bal-ance and Fade settings.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass,Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings withthe + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting anypoint on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

NOTE:Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide yourfinger up or down to change the setting aswell as touch directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volumerelative to vehicle speed. To change the SpeedAdjusted Volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Surround Sound

This feature provides simulated surround soundmode. To make your selection, touch the Sur-round Sound soft-key, select On or Off followedby pressing the arrow back soft-key.

• AUX Volume Match

This feature provides the ability to tune theaudio level for portable devices connectedthrough the AUX input. To make your selection,touch the AUX Volume Match soft-key, selectOn or Off followed by pressing the arrow backsoft-key.

• Loudness — If Equipped

The Radio automatically turns on when vehicleis in run or will recall whether it was on or off atlast ignition off. To make your selection, touchthe Loudness soft-key, select On or Off followedby pressing the arrow back soft-key.

Compass Variance Map

174


Phone/Bluetooth®After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired tothe Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further infor-mation, refer to your Uconnect® SupplementManual.

Air Suspension – If EquippedAfter pressing the Suspension soft-key the fol-lowing settings will be available:

• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension

When this feature is selected, the vehicle auto-matically lowers from ride height position whenvehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit. Touchthe box next to your selection and a check-markappears next to the feature showing the systemhas been activated or the check-mark is removedshowing the system has been deactivated.

• Suspension Display Messages

When All is selected, all the Air SuspensionAlerts will be displayed. When Warnings Only isselected only the Air Suspension Warnings willbe displayed.

• Tire Jack Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspensionsystem is disabled to prevent auto leveling ofthe suspension, while the vehicle is on a jackchanging a tire. Touch the box next to yourselection and a check-mark appears next to thefeature showing the system has been activatedor the check-mark is removed showing thesystem has been deactivated.

• Transport Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspensionsystem is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.Touch the box next to your selection and acheck-mark appears next to the feature show-ing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

• Wheel Alignment Mode

This feature prevents auto leveling of the airsuspension while performing a wheel alignmentservice. Before performing a wheel alignmentthis mode must be enabled. Refer to yourauthorized dealer for further information.

Radio SetupAfter pressing the Radio Setup soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Traffic Announcement

When this feature is selected it allows thesystem to pause receivers and media to issue atraffic bulletin. To change the Traffic Announce-ment setting touch the Off or On soft-key. Acheck mark will appear in the box when se-lected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Alternative Frequency

When this feature is selected it allows thefrequency to change automatically to maintainthe strongest signal To change the AlternativeFrequency setting touch the Off or On soft-key.A check mark will appear in the box whenselected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

175


• Regional

When this feature is selected it forces regionalservice-following enabling automatic switchingto network stations. To change the Regionalsetting touch the Off or On soft-key. A checkmark will appear in the box when selected. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.

Restore SettingsAfter pressing the Restore Settings soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset Dis-play, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to theirdefault. To restore the settings to their defaultsetting touch the Yes or No soft-key. A checkmark will appear in the box when selected. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.

Clear Personal DataAfter pressing the Clear Personal Data Settingssoft-key the following settings will be available.

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will removepersonal data including Bluetooth® devices and

presets. To Clear Personal Data touch the Yesor No soft-key. A check mark will appear in thebox when selected. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

Customer Programmable Features— Uconnect® 8.4 SettingsPress the Apps soft-key, then press the Settingssoft-key to display the menu setting screen. Inthis mode the Uconnect® system allows you toaccess programmable features that may beequipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-OnComfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,Compass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth.

NOTE:Only one touchscreen area may be selectedat a time.

When making a selection, press the soft-key toenter the desired mode. Once in the desiredmode press and release the preferred settinguntil a check-mark appears next to the setting,showing that setting has been selected. Oncethe setting is complete either press the BackArrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to

the previous menu or press the X soft-key toclose out of the settings screen. Pressing theUp or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side ofthe screen will allow you to toggle up or downthrough the available settings.

DisplayAfter pressing the Display soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of theauto display settings. To change Mode status,touch and release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the bright-ness with the headlights on. Adjust the bright-ness with the + and – setting soft-keys or byselecting any point on the scale between the +and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

176


• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the brightnesswith the headlights off. Adjust the brightness withthe + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting anypoint on the scale between the + and – soft-keys.Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one ofthree languages for all display nomenclature,including the trip functions and the navigationsystem (if equipped). Touch the Set Languagesoft-key and then touch the desired languagesoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thelanguage, showing that setting has been se-lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

• Units

When in this display, you may select to have theEVIC, odometer, and navigation system (ifequipped) changed between US and Metric unitsof measure. Touch US or Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the VoiceResponse Length settings. To change the VoiceResponse Length, touch the Brief or Detailedsoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut offthe sound heard when a touch screen button(soft-key) is pressed. Touch the TouchscreenBeep soft-key until a check-mark appears nextto the setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turndirections will appear in the display as thevehicle approaches a designated turn within aprogrammed route. To make your selection,touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Clustersoft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the

setting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

ClockAfter pressing the Clock soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Sync Time With GPS

When in this display, you may automaticallyhave the radio set the time. To change the SyncTime setting touch the Sync with GPS Timesoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Set Time Hours

When in this display, you may adjust the hours.The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must beunchecked. To make your selection touch the +or - soft-keys to adjust the hours up or down.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu or touch the X soft-key to closeout of the settings screen.

177


• Set Time Minutes

When in this display, you may adjust the min-utes. The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must beunchecked. To make your selection touch the +or - soft-keys to adjust the minutes up or down.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu or touch the X soft-key to closeout of the settings screen.

• Time Format

When in this display, you may select the timeformat display setting. Touch the Time Formatsoft-key until a check-mark appears next to the12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

Safety / AssistanceAfter pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Front Collision Sensitivity- If Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature pro-vides an audible and/or visual warning to poten-tial forward collisions. The feature can be canbe set to Far, or set to Near. The default statusof FCW is the Far setting. This means thesystem will warn you of a possible collision withthe vehicle in front of you when you are fartheraway. This gives you the most reaction time. Tochange the setting for more dynamic driving,select the Near setting. This warns you of apossible collision when you are much closer tothe vehicle in front of you. To change the FCWstatus, touch and release the Near or Farbutton. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

For further information, refer to “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle”.

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) -Active Braking

The FCW system includes Advanced BrakeAssist (ABA). When this feature is selected, theABA applies additional brake pressure when thedriver requests insufficient brake pressure toavoid a potential frontal collision. The ABAsystem becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). Tomake your selection, touch the Forward Colli-sion Warning (FCW) with Mitigation - ActiveBraking soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hadbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu. For further infor-mation, refer to “Forward Collision Warning(FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle.

178


• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — IfEquipped

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets thedistance at which the steering wheel will providefeedback for potential lane departures. TheLDW sensitivity can be set to provide either anearly, medium or late warning zone start point.To make your selection, touch the Lane Depar-ture Warning soft-key, until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, indicating that the settinghad been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)Strength — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets thestrength of the steering wheel feedback forpotential lane departures. The amount of direc-tional torque the steering system can apply tothe steering wheel to correct for vehicle lanedeparture can be set at Low, Medium or High.To make your selection, touch the Lane Depar-ture Warning soft-key until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, indicating that the settinghad been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• ParkSense®

The ParkSense® system will scan for objectsbehind the vehicle when the transmission shiftlever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed isless than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide analert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the prox-imity to other objects. The system can be en-abled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.To change the ParkSense® status, touch andrelease the Sound Only or Sounds and Displaybutton. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for system functionand operating information.

• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume

The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settingscan be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®System — if equipped. The chime volume set-tings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. Thefactory default volume setting is MEDIUM. Tomake your selection, touch the ParkSense®Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that thesetting had been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

ParkSense® will retain its last known configu-ration state through ignition cycles.

• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume

The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settingscan be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®System — if equipped. The chime volume set-tings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. Thefactory default volume setting is MEDIUM. Tomake your selection, touch the ParkSense®Rear Chime Volume soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that thesetting had been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.ParkSense® will retain its last known configu-ration state through ignition cycles.

• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking

When this feature is selected, the park assistsystem will detect objects located behind thevehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stopthe vehicle. To make your selection, touch theParkSense® Park Assist Braking soft-key, untila check-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting had been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previous

179


menu. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” forsystem function and operating information.

• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse

When this feature is selected, the exteriorsideview mirrors will tilt downward when theignition is in the RUN position and the transmis-sion shift lever is in the REVERSE position. Themirrors will move back to their previous positionwhen the transmission is shifted out of RE-VERSE. To make your selection, touch the TiltMirrors In Reverse soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting had been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Paddle Shifting

Selecting this feature enables the use of steer-ing wheel paddle switches for shifting in manualmode. To make your selection, touch the PaddleShifting soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hadbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Blind Spot Alert

When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alertfeature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, toindicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind SpotAlert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Moni-tor (BSM) system is activated and will only show avisual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights &Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor(BSM) will show a visual alert in the exteriormirrors as well as an audible alert when the turnsignal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind SpotMonitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To changethe Blind Spot Alert status, touch the Off, Lights orLights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrowback soft-key.

NOTE:If your vehicle has experienced any damagein the area where the sensor is located, evenif the fascia is not damaged, the sensor mayhave become misaligned. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer to verify sensoralignment. Having a sensor that is mis-aligned will result in the BSM not operatingto specification.

• ParkView® Backup Camera

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allowsyou to see an on-screen image of the rearsurroundings of your vehicle whenever the shiftlever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen displayalong with a caution note to “check entire sur-roundings” across the top of the screen. Afterfive seconds, this note will disappear. TheParkView® camera is located on the rear of thevehicle above the rear License plate. To makeyour selection, touch the ParkView® BackupCamera soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hadbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera ActiveGuidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that al-lows you to see active guidelines over theParkView Back up camera display whenever theshift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen display along

180


with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”across the top of the screen. After five seconds, thisnote will disappear. To make your selection, touchthe ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelinessoft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,indicating that the setting had been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera StaticGridlines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®Rear Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that al-lows you to see straight grid line overlay over theParkView Back up camera display whenever theshift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen display alongwith a caution note to “check entire surroundings”across the top of the screen. After five seconds, thisnote will disappear. To make your selection, touchthe ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlinessoft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,indicating that the setting had been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera FixedGuidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera FixedGuidelines that allows you to see Fixed Guide-lines over the ParkView Back up Camera dis-play whenever the shift lever is put into RE-VERSE. The image will be displayed on theradio touchscreen display along with a cautionnote to “check entire surroundings” across thetop of the screen. After five seconds, this notewill disappear. To make your selection, touchthe ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide-lines soft-key, until a check-mark appears nextto setting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (withcamera delay turned OFF), the rear camera modeis exited and the navigation or audio screenappears again. When the vehicle is shifted out ofREVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), therear view image with dynamic grid lines will be

displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speedexceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission isshifted into “PARK” or the ignition is switched tothe OFF position. To set the ParkView® BackupCamera Delay press the “Controls” soft-key, the“settings” soft-key, then the “Safety & DrivingAssistance” soft-key. Press the “Parkview Backupcamera Delay” soft-key to turn the ParkView®Delay ON or OFF.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system willautomatically activate the windshield wipers if itsenses moisture on the windshield. To makeyour selection, touch the Rain Sensing soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to setting,indicating that the setting had been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

181


• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill StartAssist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Elec-tronic Brake Control System” in “Starting AndOperating” for system function and operatinginformation. To make your selection, touch theHill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting had been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Brake Service

This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is inmotion. When this feature is selected, it willallow the service of the rear brake components.To make your selection touch the Brake Servicesoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Auto Park Brake

When this feature is selected, the vehicle willautomatically set the Park Brake when thevehicle is shifted to park. To make your selec-tion, touch the Auto Park Brake soft-key, until a

check-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting had been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Hold ’n Go

When this feature is selected, the vehicle willautomatically hold its position when it comes toa stop To make your selection, touch the Hold ’nGo soft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting had beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

LightsAfter pressing the Lights soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Interior Ambient Lights

When this feature is selected, it allows theadjustment of the brightness of the interiorambient lighting. To change the Interior AmbientLights setting, touch the + or - soft-key to selectyour desired Interior Ambient Light level. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlights Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows theadjustment of the amount of time the headlightsremain on after the engine is shut off. To changethe Headlights Off Delay setting, touch theHeadlights Off Delay soft-key, and choose ei-ther 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Acheck-mark appears next to setting indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights willactivate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 sec-onds when the doors are unlocked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Tochange the Illuminated Approach status, touchthe + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

182


• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlightswitch is in the AUTO position, the headlightswill turn on approximately 10 seconds after thewipers are turned on. The headlights will alsoturn off when the wipers are turned off if theywere turned on by this feature. To make yourselection, touch the Headlights With Wiperssoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the high beamheadlights will activate/deactivate automaticallyunder certain conditions. To make your selec-tion, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — IfEquipped” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights willturn on whenever the engine is running. Tomake your selection, touch the Daytime Run-ning Lights soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Adaptive Front Lighting

When this feature is selected, the headlights willturn relative to a change in the direction of thesteering wheel. To make your selection, touchthe Adaptive Front Lighting soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlight Dip

Select this feature when driving on the oppositeside of road to lower headlights. To make yourselection, touch the Headlight Dip soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Flash Headlights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the headlights willflash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-ter. This feature may be selected with or withoutthe sound horn on lock feature selected. Tomake your selection, touch the Flash Head-lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

Doors & LocksAfter pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors willunlock when the vehicle is stopped and thetransmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL posi-tion and the driver’s door is opened. To makeyour selection, touch the Auto Unlock On Exitsoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

183


• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn willsound when the door locks are activated. Tomake your selection, touch the Sound HornWith Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start


• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is se-lected, only the driver’s door will unlock on thefirst press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st Press Of

Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must pressthe RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice tounlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock AllDoors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doorswill unlock on the first press of the RKE trans-mitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE:If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock nomatter which Passive Entry equipped doorhandle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key FobUnlocks is programmed, only the driver’sdoor will unlock when the driver’s door isgrasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks is programmed, touchingthe handle more than once will only result inthe driver’s door opening. If driver door firstis selected, once the driver door is opened,the interior door lock/unlock switch can beused to unlock all doors (or use RKE trans-mitter).

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock thevehicle’s door(s) without having to press theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock orunlock buttons. To make your selection, touchthe Passive Entry soft-key until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To KnowBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

• Memory To FOB — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat po-sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-ing and exiting the vehicle. To make your selec-tion, touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

184


NOTE:The seat will return to the memorized seatlocation (if Recall Memory with Remote KeyUnlock is set to ON) when the Remote Key-less Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to un-lock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”in “Understanding The Features Of YourVehicle” for further information.

Auto-On Comfort & Remote StartAfter pressing the Auto-On Comfort & RemoteStart soft-key the following settings will be avail-able.

• Horn With Remote Start


• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected the driver’sheated seat and heated steering wheel willautomatically turn ON when temperatures arebelow 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures areabove 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat willturn ON. To make your selection, touch the AutoHeated Seats soft-key, until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, showing that setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

Engine Off OptionsAfter pressing the Engine Off Options soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power win-dow switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),power sunroof (if equipped), and power outletswill remain active for up to 10 minutes after theignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either frontdoor will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 sec-onds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutessoft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver canchoose to have the headlights remain on for 0,30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.To change the Headlight Off Delay status touchthe + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

Compass Setting – If EquippedAfter pressing the Compass Settings soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Variance

Compass Variance is the difference betweenMagnetic North and Geographic North. To com-pensate for the differences the variance shouldbe set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,per the zone map. Once properly set, the com-pass will automatically compensate for the dif-ferences, and provide the most accurate com-pass heading.

185


NOTE:Keep magnetic materials away from the topof the instrument panel, such as iPod’s,Mobile Phones, Laptop Computers and Ra-dar Detectors. This is where the compassmodule is located, and it can cause interfer-ence with the compass sensor, and it maygive false readings.

• Perform Compass Calibration

Touch the Calibration soft-key to change thissetting. This compass is self-calibrating, whicheliminates the need to manually reset the com-pass. When the vehicle is new, the compassmay appear erratic and the EVIC will display

CAL until the compass is calibrated. You mayalso calibrate the compass by pressing the ONsoft-key and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal ormetallic objects) until the CAL indicator dis-played in the EVIC turns off. The compass willnow function normally.

AudioAfter pressing the Audio soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Balance/Fade

When in this display you may adjust the Bal-ance and Fade settings.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass,Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings withthe + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting anypoint on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

NOTE:Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide yourfinger up or down to change the setting as wellas touch directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volumerelative to vehicle speed. To change the SpeedAdjusted Volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Surround Sound

This feature provides simulated surround soundmode. To make your selection, touch the Sur-round Sound soft-key, select On or Off followedby pressing the arrow back soft-key.

• AUX Volume Match

This feature provides the ability to tune theaudio level for portable devices connectedthrough the AUX input. To make your selection,touch the AUX Volume Match soft-key, selectOn or Off followed by pressing the arrow backsoft-key.

Phone/Bluetooth®After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-keythe following settings will be available.

Compass Variance Map

186


• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired tothe Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further infor-mation, refer to your Uconnect® SupplementManual.

Air Suspension – If EquippedAfter pressing the Suspension soft-key the fol-lowing settings will be available:

• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension

When this feature is selected, the vehicle auto-matically lowers from ride height position whenvehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit. Touchthe box next to your selection and a check-markappears next to the feature showing the systemhas been activated or the check-mark is re-moved showing the system has been deacti-vated.

• Suspension Display Messages

When All is selected, all the Air SuspensionAlerts will be displayed. When Warnings Only isselected only the Air Suspension Warnings willbe displayed.

• Tire Jack Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspensionsystem is disabled to prevent auto leveling ofthe suspension, while the vehicle is on a jackchanging a tire. Touch the box next to yourselection and a check-mark appears next to thefeature showing the system has been activatedor the check-mark is removed showing thesystem has been deactivated.

• Transport Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspensionsystem is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.Touch the box next to your selection and acheck-mark appears next to the feature show-ing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

• Wheel Alignment Mode

This feature prevents auto leveling of the airsuspension while performing a wheel alignmentservice. Before performing a wheel alignmentthis mode must be enabled. Refer to yourauthorized dealer for further information.

Radio SetupAfter pressing the Radio Setup soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Traffic Announcement

When this feature is selected it allows thesystem to pause receivers and media to issue atraffic bulletin. To change the Traffic Announce-ment setting touch the Off or On soft-key. Acheck mark will appear in the box when se-lected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Alternative Frequency

When this feature is selected it allows thefrequency to change automatically to maintainthe strongest signal To change the AlternativeFrequency setting touch the Off or On soft-key.A check mark will appear in the box whenselected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Regional

When this feature is selected it forces regionalservice-following enabling automatic switching tonetwork stations. To change the Regional settingtouch the Off or On soft-key. A check mark willappear in the box when selected. Then touch thearrow back soft-key.

187


Restore SettingsAfter pressing the Restore Settings soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset Dis-play, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to theirdefault. To restore the settings to their defaultsetting touch the Yes or No soft-key. A checkmark will appear in the box when selected. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.

Clear Personal DataAfter pressing the Clear Personal Data Settingssoft-key the following settings will be available.

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will removepersonal data including Bluetooth® devices andpresets. To Clear Personal Data touch the Yesor No soft-key. A check mark will appear in thebox when selected. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

SRT Performance FeaturesTo access the SRT Performance Features,touch the “SRT & More” soft-key then touch the“SRT Performance” soft-key. Press the UP orDOWN soft-key to cycle through the features.Press the feature soft-key to select that feature.

WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with thePerformance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should notbe done on any public roadways. It is recom-mended that these features be used in acontrolled environment and within the limitsof the law. The capabilities of the vehicle asmeasured by the performance pages mustnever be exploited in a reckless or danger-ous manner, which can jeopardize the user’ssafety or the safety of others. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can prevent ac-cidents.

The Performance Features include the follow-ing:

• Timers

• Engine Values

• Digital Gauge Displays

• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

• Braking Distance

• 1/8 Mile (200 meter)

• 1/4 Mile (400 meter)

• Instantaneous G-Force

• Peak G-Force

• Digital Speedometer

188


The following describes each feature and itsoperation:

Timers0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile (200 meter),1/4 Mile (400 meter)

When selected, this screen displays the time ittakes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph(0 to 100 km/h), 1/8 mile (200 meter) or 1/4 mile(400 meter).

• The feature will be “ready” when the vehiclespeed is at 0 mph (0 km/h).

• Soft-keys allow access to the current, bestand last times recorded.

Braking Distance

When selected, this screen displays the vehi-cle’s braking distance and the speed at whichthe brake pedal was depressed.

• This feature will only function when applyingthe brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

• The distance measurement will be aborted ifthe brake pedal is released before the ve-hicle comes to a complete stop.

G-ForceWhen selected, this screen displays all fourG-Force values (two lateral and two longitudi-nal) as well as steering angle.

When a force greater than zero is measured,the display will update the value as it climbs. Asthe G-Force falls, the peak forces will continueto display.

Gauges 1When selected, this screen displays the follow-ing values:

• Oil Temperature

Shows the actual oil temperature within therange of the gauge.

• Oil Pressure

Shows the actual oil pressure.

• Battery Voltage

Shows the actual battery voltage.

Gauges 2When selected, this screen displays the follow-ing values:

• Coolant Temperature

Shows the actual coolant temperature withinthe range of the gauge.

• Oil Temperature

Shows the actual oil temperature within therange of the gauge.

• Transmission Temperature

Shows the actual transmission temperaturewithin the range of the gauge.

• Intake Air Temperature

Shows the actual intake air temperature withinthe range of the gauge.

• Oil Pressure

Shows the actual oil pressure.

• Battery Voltage

Shows the actual battery voltage.

189


EngineWhen selected, this screen displays miles perhour (mph), horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oilpressure (psi) and gear selector values.

HandlingWhen selected, this screen displays peakg-force, steering and yaw angles.

OptionsWhen selected, this screen allows you tochoose a standard or customize display for yourSRT home page.

Uconnect® RADIOS — IFEQUIPPEDFor detailed information about your radio referto your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —IF EQUIPPEDLocated inside the center console upper lid, thisfeature allows an iPod® or external USB deviceto be plugged into the USB port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod®

software versions may not fully support theiPod® control features. Please visit Apple’swebsite for software updates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect®Supplement Manual.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIOCONTROLS — IF EQUIPPEDThe remote sound system controls are locatedon the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reachbehind the wheel to access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switchwith a push-button in the center and controls thevolume and mode of the sound system. Press-ing the top of the rocker switch will increase thevolume, and pressing the bottom of the rockerswitch will decrease the volume.

Pressing the center button will make the radioswitch between the various modes available(AM/FM/CD/AUX, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switchwith a push-button in the center. The function ofthe left-hand control is different depending onwhich mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand controloperation in each mode.

Radio OperationPressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up forthe next listenable station and pressing thebottom of the switch will “Seek” down for thenext listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-handcontrol will tune to the next preset station thatyou have programmed in the radio preset push-button.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View OfSteering Wheel)

190


CD PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to thenext track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of theswitch once will go to the beginning of thecurrent track, or to the beginning of the previoustrack if it is within one second after the currenttrack begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it playsthe second track; three times, it will play thethird, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switchhas no function for a single-disc CD player.However, when a multiple-disc CD player isequipped on the vehicle, the center button willselect the next available CD in the player.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCETo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take thefollowing precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touchingthe surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with asoft cloth, wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoidscratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thin-ner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperaturesmay become too high.

NOTE:If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched,reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture ordew on the disc) oversized, or have protectionencoding. Try a known good disc before con-sidering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION ANDMOBILE PHONESUnder certain conditions, the mobile phone beingon in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisyperformance from your radio. This condition may

be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mo-bile phone antenna. This condition is not harmfulto the radio. If your radio performance does notsatisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volumebe turned down or off during mobile phone opera-tion when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

CLIMATE CONTROLSThe air conditioning and heating system is de-signed to make you comfortable in all types ofweather. This system can be operated througheither the Automatic Climate Controls on the instru-ment panel or through the Uconnect® systemdisplay.

When the Uconnect® system is in differentmodes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) thedriver and passenger temperature settings willbe indicated at the top of the display.

191


General OverviewHard-Keys

The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect®screen.

Soft-Keys

Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect®system screen.

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.Performing this function again will cause theMAX A/C operation to switch into manual modeand the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Per-forming this function again will cause the A/Coperation to switch into manual mode and theA/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when ON.

Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys

Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic TemperatureControls — Soft-keys

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic TemperatureControls — Soft-keys

192


4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin tem-perature by adjusting airflow distribution andamount. Performing this function will cause theATC to switch between manual mode and au-tomatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation”for more information.

5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflowsetting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-nates when this feature is ON. Performing thisfunction will cause the ATC to switch intomanual mode. The blower speed may increasewhen Defrost mode is selected. If the frontdefrost mode is turned off the climate systemwill return the previous setting.

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rearwindow defroster and the heated outside mir-rors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminatewhen the rear window defroster is on. The rearwindow defroster automatically turns off after10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive windowcleaners on the interior surface of thewindow. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash-ing solution, wiping parallel to the heatingelements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, orabrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from thewindow.

7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the passenger with independent tem-perature control. Push the hard-key button forwarmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-ture bar towards the red arrow soft-key forwarmer temperature settings.

NOTE:Pressing this button while in Sync mode willautomatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Control DownButton

Provides the passenger with independent tem-perature control. Push the hard-key button forcooler temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-ture bar towards the blue arrow soft-key forcooler temperature settings.

NOTE:Pressing this button while in Sync mode willautomatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Syncfeature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminatedwhen this feature is enabled. Sync is used tosynchronize the passenger temperature settingwith the driver temperature setting. Changingthe passenger temperature setting while inSync will automatically exit this feature.

193


10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount ofair forced through the climate system. There areseven blower speeds available. Adjusting theblower will cause automatic mode to switch tomanual operation. The speeds can be selectedusing either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:

Hard-key

The blower speed increases as you turn thecontrol clockwise from the lowest blower set-ting. The blower speed decreases as you turnthe knob counter-clockwise.

Soft-key

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blowersetting and the large blower icon to increase theblower setting. Blower can also be selected bypressing the blower bar area between the icons.

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjustedso air comes from the instrument panel outlets,

floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets.The Mode settings are as follows:Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the in-strument panel. Each of these outletscan be individually adjusted to direct

the flow of air. The air vanes of the centeroutlets and outboard outlets can be moved upand down or side to side to regulate airflowdirection. There is a shut off wheel locatedbelow the air vanes to shut off or adjust theamount of airflow from these outlets.Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument paneloutlets and floor outlets. A slightamount of air is directed through the

defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfortconditions to provide cooler air out of thepanel outlets and warmer air from the flooroutlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. Aslight amount of air is directed throughthe defrost and side window demisteroutlets.

Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost andside window demist outlets. This modeworks best in cold or snowy conditions.

Defrost Mode

Air comes from the windshield andside window demist outlets. Use De-frost mode with maximum temperature

settings for best windshield and side windowdefrosting and defogging. When the defrostmode is selected, the blower level may willincrease.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Cli-mate Control ON/OFF.

194


13. Driver Temperature Control DownButton

Provides the driver with independent tempera-ture control. Push the hard-key button for coolertemperature settings or on the touch-screen,press and slide the soft-key temperature bartowards the blue arrow soft-key for cooler tem-perature settings

NOTE:In Sync mode, this button will also automati-cally adjust the passenger temperature set-ting at the same time.

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the driver with independent tempera-ture control. Push the hard-key button forwarmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-ture bar towards the red arrow soft-key forwarmer temperature settings.

NOTE:In Sync mode, this button will also automati-cally adjust the passenger temperature set-ting at the same time.

15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)

Press the temperature soft-key to regulate thetemperature of the air inside the passengercompartment. Moving the temperature bar intothe red area, indicates warmer temperatures.Moving the temperature bar into the blue areaindicates cooler temperatures.

Climate Control FunctionsA/C (Air Conditioning)The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows theoperator to manually activate or deactivate theair conditioning system. When the air condition-ing system is turned on, cool dehumidified airwill flow through the outlets into the cabin. Forimproved fuel economy, press the A/C button toturn off the air conditioning and manually adjustthe blower and airflow mode settings. Also,make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level orFloor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield orside glass, select Defrost mode and in-crease blower speed.

• If your air conditioning performance seemslower than expected, check the front of theA/C condenser (located in front of the ra-diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in-sects. Clean with a gentle water spray frombehind the radiator and through the con-denser. Fabric front fascia protectors mayreduce airflow to the condenser, reducingair conditioning performance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum coolingperformance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/Cand the prior settings. The soft-key illuminateswhen MAX A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode positioncan be adjusted to desired user settings. Press-ing other settings will cause the MAX A/Coperation to switch to the selected setting andcause MAX A/C to exit.

195


Recirculation

When outside air contains smoke,odors, or high humidity, or if rapidcooling is desired, you may wish torecirculate interior air by pressingthe Recirculation control button.The recirculation indicator will illu-

minate when this button is selected. Push thebutton a second time to turn off the Recircula-tion mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE:In cold weather, use of Recirculation modemay lead to excessive window fogging. Therecirculation feature may be unavailable(soft button greyed out). The Recirculationmode is not allowed in Defrost mode toimprove window clearing operation. Recir-culation will be disabled automatically if thismode is selected. Attempting to use Recir-culation while in this mode will cause theLED in the control button to blink and thenturn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)Automatic Operation

1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button(4) on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would likethe system to maintain by adjusting the driverand passenger temperature hard or soft controlbuttons (7, 8, 13, 14). Once the desired tem-perature is displayed, the system will achieveand automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfortlevel, it is not necessary to change the settings.You will experience the greatest efficiency bysimply allowing the system to function automati-cally.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the tempera-ture settings for cold or hot vehicles. Thesystem automatically adjusts the tem-perature, mode, and blower speed to pro-vide comfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.or Metric units by selecting the US/Mcustomer-programmable feature. Refer tothe “Uconnect® System Settings” in thissection of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in theAutomatic mode, during cold start-ups theblower fan will remain on low until the enginewarms up. The blower will increase in speedand transition into Auto mode.

Manual OperationThe system allows for manual selection ofblower speed, air distribution mode, A/C statusand recirculation control.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixedspeed by adjusting the blower control. The fanwill now operate at a fixed speed until additionalspeeds are selected. This allows the front oc-cupants to control the volume of air circulated inthe vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of theairflow by selecting one of the available modesettings. A/C operation and Recirculation con-trol can also be manually selected in Manualoperation.

196


Operating TipsNOTE:Refer to the chart at the end of this sectionfor suggested control settings for variousweather conditions.

Summer OperationThe engine cooling system must be protectedwith a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provideproper corrosion protection and to protectagainst engine overheating. A solution of 50%OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant thatmeets the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-12106 and 50% water is recom-mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolantselection.

Winter OperationUse of the air Recirculation mode during Wintermonths is not recommended because it maycause window fogging.

Vacation StorageAny time you store your vehicle or keep it out ofservice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,run the air conditioning system at idle for aboutfive minutes in the fresh air and high blowersetting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-cation to minimize the possibility of compressordamage when the system is started again.

Window FoggingInterior fogging on the windshield can be quicklyremoved by turning the mode selector to De-frost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used tomaintain a clear windshield and provide suffi-cient heating. If side window fogging becomes aproblem increase blower speed. Vehicle win-dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainyor humid weather.

NOTE:Recirculate without A/C should not be usedfor long periods, as fogging may occur.

Outside Air IntakeMake sure the air intake, located directly in frontof the windshield, is free of obstructions such asleaves. Leaves collected in the air intake mayreduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum,they could plug the water drains. In Wintermonths, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,slush, and snow.

A/C Air FilterThe climate control system filters outside aircontaining dust, pollen and some odors. Strongodors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for filter replacement instructions.

197


Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

198


5STARTING AND OPERATING

• STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202• Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203• Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203• Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . .204• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205• Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206• Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . .206• Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206• Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

• PADDLE SHIFT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211• Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

• SELEC-TRAC® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212• Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212• Active Damping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213• Launch Mode – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

199


• DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214• Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215• FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . .216• PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216• ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

• Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218• Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218• Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218• Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222• ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF

Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222• TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

• Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223• Tire Inflation Pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224• Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224• Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225• Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225• Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226• Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226• Tire Spinning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227• Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228• Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228• Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

• TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

200


• TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .230• Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232• Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings . . . . . . . .232• TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

• FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235• 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235• Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236• Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236• Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236• Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

• ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237• Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

• VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239• Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

• TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240• Breakaway Cable Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241• Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . .243• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

• RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . .248

201


STARTING PROCEDURESBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fastenyour seat belt, and if present, instruct all otheroccupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.


(Continued)


• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave a vehicle equippedwith Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC orON/RUN mode. A child could operatepower windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

Automatic TransmissionThe shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL orPARK position before you can start the engine.Apply the brakes before shifting into any drivinggear.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if thefollowing precautions are not observed:• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or

NEUTRAL into any forward gear when theengine is above idle speed.

(Continued)


• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle hascome to a complete stop.

• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after thevehicle has come to a complete stop andthe engine is at idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sureyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)

NOTE:Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping orpressing the accelerator pedal.Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob withIntegrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch tothe START position and release it as soon as thestarter engages. The starter motor will continue torun, and it will disengage automatically when theengine is running. If the engine fails to start, thestarter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds.If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the“Normal Starting” procedure.

202


Keyless Enter-N-Go™

This feature allows thedriver to operate the ig-nition switch with thepush of a button, as longas the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™Key Fob is in the pas-senger compartment.

Normal StartingUsing The ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEU-TRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to startthe vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starterwill disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engineprior to the engine starting, press the buttonagain.

NOTE:Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping orpressing the accelerator pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINESTART/STOP Button

1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK,then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFFposition.

3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK,the ENGINE START/STOP button must be heldfor two seconds and vehicle speed must beabove 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine willshut off. The ignition switch position will remainin the ACC position until the shift lever/shiftselector is in PARK and the button is pressedtwice to the OFF position. If the shift lever/shiftselector is not in PARK and the ENGINESTART/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC(if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”message and the engine will remain running.Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position,or it could roll.

NOTE:If the ignition switch is left in the ACC orRUN (engine not running) position and thetransmission is in PARK, the system willautomatically time out after 30 minutes ofinactivity and the ignition will switch to theOFF position.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – WithDriver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/ClutchPedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operatessimilar to an ignition switch. It has four positions,OFF, ACC, RUN and START. To change theignition switch positions without starting thevehicle and use the accessories follow thesesteps.

• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFFposition:

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP buttononce to change the ignition switch to the ACCposition (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODEACCESSORY”),

203


• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button asecond time to change the ignition switch tothe RUN position (EVIC displays “IGNITIONMODE RUN”),

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button athird time to return the ignition switch to theOFF position (EVIC displays “IGNITIONMODE OFF”).

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°FOr −29°C)To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-tures, use of an externally powered electricengine block heater (available from your autho-rized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid intothe throttle body air inlet opening in an at-tempt to start the vehicle. This could result inflash fire causing serious personal injury.

(Continued)


• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicleto get it started. Vehicles equipped with anautomatic transmission cannot be startedthis way. Unburned fuel could enter thecatalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage the con-verter and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start can bedangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-gencies” for further information.

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINESTART/STOP Button)If the engine fails to start after you have followedthe “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather"procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excessfuel:

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and hold it.

3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

The starter motor will engage automatically, runfor 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once thisoccurs, release the accelerator pedal and thebrake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeatthe “Normal Starting” procedure.

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using FobWith Integrated Key)If the engine fails to start after you have followedthe “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather”procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excessfuel:

1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and hold it.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the START posi-tion and release it as soon as the starter en-gages.

204


The starter motor will disengage automaticallyin 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release theaccelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to theLOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to15 seconds before trying again.

After StartingThe idle speed is controlled automatically and itwill decrease as the engine warms up.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if thefollowing precautions are not observed:• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has

come to a complete stop.

(Continued)


• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after thevehicle has come to a complete stop andthe engine is at idle speed.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:You must press and hold the brake pedalwhile shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher thanidle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressingthe brake pedal, the vehicle could acceleratequickly forward or in reverse. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and hit someone or

(Continued)


something. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and your foot isfirmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit a ve-hicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the keyfob. When the ignition is in the OFF posi-tion, the transmission is locked in PARK,securing the vehicle against unwantedmovement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

205




• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Goin the ACC or ON/RUN position. A childcould operate power windows, other con-trols, or move the vehicle.

Key Ignition Park InterlockThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition ParkInterlock which requires the transmission to bein PARK before the engine can be turned off.

This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leavingthe vehicle without placing the transmission inPARK. This system also locks the transmissionin PARK whenever the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockSystemThis vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds theshift lever in PARK unless the brakes are ap-plied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, theengine must be running and the brake pedalmust be pressed. The brake pedal must also bepressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE orREVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or mov-ing at low speeds.

Fuel Economy (ECO) ModeThe Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improvethe vehicle’s overall fuel economy during nor-mal driving conditions. Press the “ECO” switchin the center stack of the instrument panel anda green light will indicate the ECO mode isengaged.

When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is en-gaged, the vehicle control systems will changethe following:

• The transmission will upshift sooner anddownshift later.

• The torque converter clutch may engage atlower engine speeds and remain on longer.

• The engine idle speed will be lower.

• The overall driving performance will be moreconservative.

Fuel Economy Mode Switch

206


• Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-rarily inhibited based on temperature andother factors.

NOTE:ECO mode is only available in AUTO mode.

Eight–Speed AutomaticTransmissionYour vehicle is equipped with a state of the art,fuel efficient eight-speed transmission. Theelectronic shift lever in this vehicle does notslide like a conventional shifter. Instead, theshift lever is spring loaded and moves forwardand rearward, always returning to the centerposition after each gear is selected. The trans-mission gear (PRND) is displayed both on theshift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC). To select a gear range,press the lock button on the shift lever andmove the lever rearward or forward. You mustalso press the brake pedal to shift the transmis-sion out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL intoDRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle isstopped or moving at low speeds (refer to“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” inthis section). To shift past multiple gear ranges

at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move thelever past the first (or second) detent. Select theDRIVE range for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission pro-vides a precise shift schedule. The transmissionelectronics are self-calibrating; therefore, thefirst few shifts on a new vehicle may be some-what abrupt. This is a normal condition, andprecision shifts will develop within a few hun-dred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSEwhen the accelerator pedal is released and thevehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot onthe brake pedal when shifting between thesegears.

The transmission shift lever provides PARK,REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORTshift positions. Once in the DRIVE range, tap-ping the shift lever rearward will toggle betweenSPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do notneed to press the shift lever button when tog-gling between DRIVE and SPORT modes.Manual shifts can be made using the shiftpaddles mounted on the steering wheel. Press-ing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or

SPORT position will manually select the trans-mission gear, and will display the current gear inthe instrument cluster. Refer to "Paddle ShiftMode" in this section for further information.

Gear RangesDO NOT race the engine when shifting fromPARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:After selecting any gear range, wait a mo-ment to allow the selected gear to engagebefore accelerating. This is especially im-portant when the engine is cold.

Shift Lever

207


PARK

This range supplements the parking brake bylocking the transmission. The engine can bestarted in this range. Never attempt to usePARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply theparking brake when leaving the vehicle in thisrange.

When parking on a level surface, you may shiftthe transmission into PARK first, and then applythe parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakebefore shifting the transmission to PARK. As anadded precaution, turn the front wheels towardthe curb on a downhill grade and away from thecurb on an uphill grade.

NOTE:On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure thatthe transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement and pos-sible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure youand others if it is not in PARK. Make surethe transmission is in PARK before leavingthe vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle andhit someone or something. Only shift intogear when the engine is idling normallyand your foot is firmly pressing the brakepedal.

(Continued)


• Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit a ve-hicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the keyfob. When the ignition is in the OFF posi-tion, the transmission is locked in PARK,securing the vehicle against unwantedmovement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-ing children to be in a vehicle unattendedis dangerous for a number of reasons. Achild or others could be seriously or fatallyinjured. Children should be warned not totouch the parking brake, brake pedal or theshift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or

(Continued)

208



near the vehicle (or in a location acces-sible to children), and do not leave theignition (in a vehicle equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUNposition. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition (of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Achild could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,you must start the engine, and also pressthe brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to theshift lever could result.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT race the engine when shiftingfrom PARK or NEUTRAL into another gearrange, as this can damage the drivetrain.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,you must start the engine, and also pressthe brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to theshift lever could result.

The following indicators should be used toensure that you have engaged the transmissioninto the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, press the lock buttonon the shift lever and push the lever all the wayforward until it stops. When released, the leverwill return to its home position.

• With brake pedal released, look at the trans-mission gear position display and verify that itindicates the PARK position.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward.Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle hascome to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL

Use this range when the vehicle is standing forprolonged periods with the engine running. Theengine may be started in this range. Apply theparking brake and shift the transmission intoPARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn offthe ignition to coast down a hill. These areunsafe practices that limit your response tochanging traffic or road conditions. You mightlose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

209


CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving forany other reason with the transmission inNEUTRAL can cause severe transmissiondamage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Dis-abled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergen-cies” for further information.

DRIVE

This range should be used for most city andhighway driving. It provides the smoothest up-shifts and downshifts, and the best fueleconomy. The transmission automatically up-shifts through all forward gears. The DRIVEposition provides optimum driving characteris-tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs(such as when operating the vehicle underheavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, travel-ing into strong head winds, or while towingheavy trailers), select TOW mode (refer to"Selec-Trac®" in "Starting and Operating") oruse the Paddle Shift switches (refer to "Paddle

Shift Mode" in this section for further informa-tion) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-tions, using TOW mode or a lower gear willimprove performance and extend transmissionlife by reducing excessive shifting and heatbuildup.

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F[-30°C] or below), transmission operation maybe modified depending on engine and transmis-sion temperature as well as vehicle speed.Normal operation will resume once the trans-mission temperature has risen to a suitablelevel.

SPORT

This mode alters the transmission’s automaticshift schedule for sportier driving. Upshiftspeeds are increased to make full use of avail-able engine power. To switch between DRIVEand SPORT modes, tap the shift lever rearward.SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE.

Transmission Limp Home ModeTransmission function is monitored electroni-cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition isdetected that could result in transmission dam-age, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-

vated. In this mode, the transmission may op-erate only in certain gears, or may not shift atall. Vehicle performance may be severely de-graded and the engine may stall. In somesituations, the transmission may not re-engageif the engine is turned off and restarted. TheMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-nated. A message in the instrument cluster willinform the driver of the more serious conditions,and indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, thetransmission can be reset to regain all forwardgears by performing the following steps:

NOTE:In cases where the instrument cluster mes-sage indicates the transmission may notre-engage after engine shutdown, performthis procedure only in a desired location(preferably, at your authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.

3. Turn the engine OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

210


5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If theproblem is no longer detected, the transmissionwill return to normal operation.

NOTE:Even if the transmission can be reset, werecommend that you visit your authorizeddealer at your earliest possible conve-nience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-tic equipment to determine if the problemcould recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorizeddealer service is required.

When To Use TOW ModeWhen driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent trans-mission shifting occurs, select TOW mode, us-ing the rotary switch on the center console.Selecting TOW mode will improve performanceand reduce the potential for transmission over-heating or failure due to excessive shifting.Refer to “Selec-Trac®” in “Starting And Operat-ing” for further information.

PADDLE SHIFT MODEPaddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive trans-mission feature providing manual shift control,giving you more control of the vehicle. PaddleShift allows you to maximize engine braking,eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,and improve overall vehicle performance. Thissystem can also provide you with more controlduring passing, city driving, cold slippery condi-tions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and manyother situations.

OperationWhen the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORTmode, it will operate automatically, shifting be-tween the eight available gears. To engagePaddle Shift mode, simply tap one of the steer-ing wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while inDRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enterPaddle Shift mode will downshift the transmis-sion to the next lower gear, while using (+) toenter Paddle Shift mode will retain the currentgear. When Paddle Shift mode is active, thecurrent transmission gear is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shiftup or down when (+/-) is manually selected bythe driver, unless an engine lugging or over-speed condition would result. It will remain inthe selected gear until another upshift or down-shift is chosen, except as described below.

• Normally, in Paddle Shift mode, the transmis-sion will automatically shift up when maxi-mum engine speed is reached. If, however,Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT orTRACK mode, the transmission will remain inthe selected gear even when maximum en-gine speed is reached. The transmission willupshift only when commanded by the driver.

• The transmission will automatically downshiftas the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lug-ging) and will display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift tofirst gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-mission as the vehicle is accelerated.

211


• You can start out, from a stop, in first orsecond gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allowstarting in second gear. Starting out in sec-ond gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause theengine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift attoo low of a vehicle speed.

• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will pro-gressively downshift the transmission to thelowest gear possible at the current speed.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeablewhen Paddle Shift mode is enabled.

• The system may revert to automatic shiftmode if a fault or overheat condition isdetected.

To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press andhold the (+) shift paddle until “D” or “S” is onceagain displayed in the instrument cluster. Youcan shift in or out of the Paddle Shift mode atany time without taking your foot off the accel-erator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheelscould lose their grip and the vehicle couldskid, causing a collision or personal injury.

SELEC-TRAC® — IF EQUIPPED

DescriptionSelec-Trac® combines the capabilities of thevehicle control systems, along with driver input,to provide the best performance for all terrains.

Selec-Trac® consists of the following positions:

• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration.Performance based tuning that provides arear wheel drive feel but with improved han-dling and acceleration over a two-wheel drivevehicle. The customer has the option ofgoing to partial ESC. The active suspensionsystem will be in Semi Firm mode, and agreen flag will light up in the instrumentcluster. The transmission will provide a moreaggressive shifting pattern (Refer to “PaddleShift Mode” in “Starting And Operating” forfurther information). This feature will reset toAUTO on an ignition cycle.

• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability ininclement weather. Use on and off road onloose traction surfaces such as snow. Whenin Snow mode (depending on certain operat-ing conditions), the transmission may usesecond gear (rather than first gear) duringlaunches, to minimize wheel slippage.

Selec-Trac® Switch

212


• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheeldrive operation can be used on and off road.Balances traction with seamless steering feelto provide improved handling and accelera-tion over two-wheel drive vehicles. The ac-tive suspension system will be in TouringMode.

• Track – Track road calibration for use on hightraction surfaces. Driveline is maximized fortraction. Some binding may be felt on lessforgiving surfaces. The electronic brake con-trols are set to Partial OFF to limit tractioncontrol management of throttle and wheelspin.

• The transmission will be in SPORT mode andprovide a more aggressive shifting pattern.Refer to “Paddle Shift Mode” in “Starting AndOperating” for further information.

• The customer has the option of going toFULL OFF with no interaction from the ESCSystem. The active suspension system willbe in Full Firm mode.

• This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignitioncycle.

• Tow – Use this mode for towing. Vehiclesuspension will go to Firm mode. Trailersway control is enabled in the ESC system.The terrain switch will remain in this positionthrough an ignition cycle until the customercycles into another position.

Active Damping SystemThis vehicle is equipped with an electroniccontrolled damping system. This system re-duces body roll and pitch in many driving situ-ations including cornering, acceleration andbraking. There are 3 modes:

• Touring Mode (Available in terrain positionsAUTO and SNOW) — Used during highwayspeeds where a touring suspension feel isdesired.

• Firm Mode (Available in terrain positionsSPORT and TOW) — Provides a firm sus-pension for better handling.

• Full Firm (Available in TRACK mode) —Provides a full firm suspension for an aggres-sive track experience.

Launch Mode – If EquippedThis system maximizes acceleration traction forstraight line racing.

1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a leveltrack surface with the engine running.

2. Set the steering wheel for straight aheaddriving.

3. Fully press the brake pedal.

4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button.

5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

NOTE:If the cluster launch EVIC message indicatesall conditions are correct for launch and thethrottle is pressed to the floor quickly(within approximately 1/2 second) the sys-tem will hold the engine speed to a presetspeed (below the engine rev limiter speed).

6. Release the brake pedal.

Pressing the launch control button when launchcontrol is active will deactivate launch control.

213


NOTE:

• Launch Mode brings the engine to opti-mum RPM and waits for the driver torelease the brake. Launch Mode thenuses engine throttle only to achieve con-trolled wheelslip for maximum accelera-tion through first gear.

• Launch Mode can be initiated in any of theSelect Trac Modes.

• Launch Mode is not available until the 500mile break-in has been achieved.

DRIVING THROUGH WATERDriving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to en-sure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Due to lower ground clearance, driving yourvehicle up steep driveways, approach rampsor near parking blocks may cause damage tothe front fascia and ground effects.

(Continued)


• Driving through snow more than 4 inches(100 mm) deep may cause damage to thefront fascia and ground effects.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a pathwhere water is flowing and/or rising (as instorm run-off). Flowing water can wear awaythe road or path’s surface and cause yourvehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-more, flowing and/or rising water can carryyour vehicle away swiftly. Failure to followthis warning may result in injuries that areserious or fatal to you, your passengers, andothers around you.

Shallow Standing WaterAlthough your vehicle is capable of drivingthrough shallow standing water, consider thefollowing Caution and Warning before doing so.

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standingwater before driving through it. Never drivethrough standing water that is deeper thanthe bottom of the tire rims mounted on thevehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or thepath that is under water and if there areany obstacles in the way before drivingthrough the standing water.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) whendriving through standing water. This willminimize wave effects.

(Continued)

214



• Driving through standing water may causedamage to your vehicle’s drivetrain com-ponents. Always inspect your vehicle’s flu-ids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle,etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluidthat is milky or foamy in appearance) afterdriving through standing water. Do notcontinue to operate the vehicle if any fluidappears contaminated, as this may resultin further damage. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s enginecan cause it to lock up and stall out, andcause serious internal damage to the en-gine. Such damage is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits yourvehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not ex-ceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving throughstanding water.

• Driving through standing water limits yourvehicle’s braking capabilities, which in-creases stopping distances. Therefore, af-ter driving through standing water, driveslowly and lightly press on the brake pedalseveral times to dry the brakes.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s enginecan cause it to lock up and stall out, andleave you stranded.

• Failure to follow these warnings may resultin injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

POWER STEERINGThe standard power steering system will giveyou good vehicle response and increased easeof maneuverability in tight spaces. The systemwill provide mechanical steering capability ifpower assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is inter-rupted, it will still be possible to steer yourvehicle. Under these conditions, you will ob-serve a substantial increase in steering effort,especially at very low vehicle speeds and dur-ing parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of thesteering wheel travel are considered nor-mal and do not indicate that there is aproblem with the power steering system.

215


• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, thepower steering pump may make noise fora short amount of time. This is due to thecold, thick fluid in the steering system.This noise should be considered normal,and it does not in any way damage thesteering system.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced powersteering assist could pose a safety risk toyourself and others. Service should be ob-tained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering systemat the end of the steering wheel travel willincrease the steering fluid temperature and itshould be avoided when possible. Damageto the power steering pump may occur.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY —IF EQUIPPEDThis feature offers improved fuel economy byshutting off four of the engine’s eight cylindersduring light load and cruise conditions. Thesystem is automatic with no driver inputs oradditional driving skills required.

NOTE:This system may take some time to return tofull functionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKEBefore leaving the vehicle, make sure that theparking brake is fully applied and place the shiftlever in the PARK position.

The foot operated parking brake is locatedbelow the lower left corner of the instrumentpanel. To apply the park brake, firmly push thepark brake pedal fully. To release the parkingbrake, press the park brake pedal a secondtime and let your foot up as you feel the brakedisengage.

When the parking brake is applied with theignition switch in the ON position, the “BrakeWarning Light” in the instrument cluster willilluminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and thetransmission is placed in gear, the “BrakeWarning Light” will flash. If vehicle speedis detected, a chime will sound to alert thedriver. Fully release the parking brakebefore attempting to move the vehicle.

Parking Brake

216


• This light only shows that the parkingbrake is applied. It does not show thedegree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn thefront wheels toward the curb on a downhillgrade and away from the curb on an uphillgrade. Apply the parking brake before placingthe shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load onthe transmission locking mechanism may makeit difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.The parking brake should always be appliedwhenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement and pos-sible injury or damage.

(Continued)


• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle. Never leave children alone in avehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Achild could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-gaged before driving; failure to do so canlead to brake failure and a collision.

(Continued)


• Always fully apply the parking brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury. Also be certain toleave the transmission in PARK. Failure todo so may allow the vehicle to roll andcause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on withthe parking brake released, a brake systemmalfunction is indicated. Have the brakesystem serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately.

217


ELECTRONIC BRAKECONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with an advancedelectronic brake control system that includesthe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), TractionControl System (TCS), Brake Assist System(BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), andElectronic Stability Control (ESC). All five ofthese systems work together to enhance ve-hicle stability and control in various drivingconditions.

Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer SwayControl (TSC).

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)This system aids the driver in maintaining ve-hicle control under adverse braking conditions.The system controls hydraulic brake pressureto prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skid-ding on slippery surfaces during braking.

WARNING!

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws ofphysics from acting on the vehicle, nor can itincrease the traction afforded by prevailingroad conditions. The ABS cannot preventcollisions, including those resulting from ex-cessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabili-ties of an ABS-equipped vehicle must neverbe exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’ssafety or the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)This system monitors the amount of wheel spinof each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin isdetected, brake pressure is applied to the slip-ping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced toprovide enhanced acceleration and stability.

A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differ-ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slipdifferential and controls the wheel spin across adriven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is

spinning faster than the other, the system willapply the brake of the spinning wheel. This willallow more engine torque to be applied to thewheel that is not spinning. This feature remainsactive even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off”mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control(ESC)” in this section for further information.

Brake Assist System (BAS)The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’sbraking capability during emergency brakingmaneuvers. The system detects an emergencybraking situation by sensing the rate andamount of brake application and then appliesoptimum pressure to the brakes. This can helpreduce braking distances. The BAS comple-ments the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Apply-ing the brakes very quickly results in the bestBAS assistance. To receive the benefit of thesystem, you must apply continuous brakingpressure during the stopping sequence (do not“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedalpressure unless braking is no longer desired.Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS isdeactivated.

218


WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent the natural lawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, norcan it increase the traction afforded byprevailing road conditions.

• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, includ-ing those resulting from excessive speedin turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped ve-hicle must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)This system anticipates the potential for wheellift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheelinput and the speed of the vehicle. When ERMdetermines that the rate of change of the steer-ing wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are suffi-cient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may alsoreduce engine power to lessen the chance thatwheel lift will occur. ERM will only interveneduring very severe or evasive driving maneu-vers.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel liftoccurring during severe or evasive driving ma-neuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to otherfactors, such as road conditions, leaving theroadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, roadconditions, and driving conditions, influencethe chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,especially those that involve leaving the road-way or striking objects or other vehicles. Thecapabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user’ssafety or the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)This system enhances directional control andstability of the vehicle under various drivingconditions. ESC corrects for oversteering orundersteering of the vehicle by applying thebrake of the appropriate wheel to assist incounteracting the oversteer or understeer con-dition. Engine power may also be reduced tohelp the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determinethe vehicle path intended by the driver andcompares it to the actual path of the vehicle.When the actual path does not match theintended path, ESC applies the brake of theappropriate wheel to assist in counteracting theoversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning morethan appropriate for the steering wheel posi-tion.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning lessthan appropriate for the steering wheelposition.

219


The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”located in the instrument cluster will start to flashas soon as the tires lose traction and the ESCsystem becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when theTCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” begins to flash during accelera-tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as littlethrottle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speedand driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can-not prevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road condi-tions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, includ-ing those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent col-lisions resulting from loss of vehicle controldue to inappropriate driver input for the con-ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful

(Continued)


driver can prevent collisions. The capabilitiesof an ESC equipped vehicle must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerous mannerwhich could jeopardize the user’s safety orthe safety of others.

The ESC system has three available operatingmodes.

On

This is the normal operating mode for ESC .Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC sys-tem will be in this “On” mode. This mode shouldbe used for most driving situations. ESC shouldonly be turned to “Partial Off” mode for specificreasons as noted below.

Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily pressingthe “ESC OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off”mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the

BLD feature described in the TCS section, hasbeen disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”will be illuminated. All other stability features ofESC function normally. This mode is intended tobe used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, orgravel conditions and more wheel spin thanESC would normally allow is required to gaintraction. To turn ESC on again, momentarilypress the “ESC OFF” switch. This will restorethe normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

ESC OFF Switch

220


NOTE:To improve the vehicle’s traction when drivingwith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow,sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch tothe “Partial Off” mode by pressing the “ESCOFF” switch. Once the situation requiring ESCto be switched to the “Partial Off” mode isovercome, turn ESC back on by momentarilypressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may bedone while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slipfeature described in the TCS section), hasbeen disabled and the “ESC Off IndicatorLight” will be illuminated. When in “PartialOff” mode, the engine power reductionfeature of TCS is disabled, and the en-hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESCsystem is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled whenthe ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.

Full Off

This mode is available in TRACK mode only.Refer to “Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Oper-ating” for further information. In this mode, allTCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF.To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while thevehicle is stopped with the engine running. Afterfive seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-minate, and the "ESC OFF" message will dis-play in the vehicle odometer. Press and releasethe TRIP ODOMETER button located on theinstrument cluster to clear this message. The“ESC OFF” message may appear in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Referto “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information. To turn ESC ONagain, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.

NOTE:The �ESC OFF� message will display and theaudible chime will sound when the shiftlever is moved into the PARK position fromany position other than PARK and thenmoved out of the PARK position. This willoccur when the message was previouslycleared.

WARNING!

In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the enginetorque reduction and stability features aredisabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehiclestability offered by ESC is unavailable. In anemergency evasive maneuver, the ESC sys-tem will not engage to assist in maintainingstability. "ESC Off" mode is intended foroff-highway or off-road use only.

221


NOTE:When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature ofthe system remains active. This feature con-trols wheel spin across an axle quite simi-larly to a limited slip differential. If one wheelon an axle is spinning faster than the other,the system will apply the brake of the spin-ning wheel and allow more engine torque tobe applied to the wheel that is not spinning.To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv-ing with tire chains, or when starting off indeep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desir-able to switch to the “Partial Off” mode bymomentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch.

WARNING!

With the ESC switched OFF, the enhancedvehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable.In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESCsystem will not engage to assist in maintainingstability. The “Full Off” ESC mode is intendedfor off-highway or off-road only.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognizean excessively swaying trailer and will take theappropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.The system may reduce engine power andapply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) tocounteract the sway of the trailer. TSC willbecome active automatically once an exces-sively swaying trailer is recognized. No driveraction is required. Note that TSC cannot stop alltrailers from swaying. Always use caution whentowing a trailer and follow the trailer tongueweight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-ing” in this section for further information. WhenTSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the en-gine power may be reduced and you may feelthe brakes being applied to individual wheels toattempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC isdisabled when the ESC system is in the “PartialOff” mode.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicledown, stop at the nearest safe location, andadjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-dicator Light” in the instrument clus-ter will come on when the ignitionswitch is cycled to the ON position.It should go out with the enginerunning. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-ously with the engine running, a malfunction hasbeen detected in the ESC system. If this lightremains on after several ignition cycles, and thevehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), seeyour authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the problem diagnosed and corrected.

222


The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash assoon as the tires lose traction and the ESC systembecomes active. The “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. Ifthe “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on theaccelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the“ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” come on momentarily each timethe ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, theESC system will be ON even if it wascycled off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing orclicking sounds when it is active. This isnormal; the sounds will stop when ESCbecomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” in-dicates the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) is partially off or fullyoff.

TIRES — GENERALINFORMATION

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to thesafe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.Three primary areas are affected by impropertire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

• Under-inflation increases tire flexing andcan result in over-heating and tire failure.

(Continued)


• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can fail sud-denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steeringproblems. You could lose control of yourvehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.

EconomyImproper inflation pressures can cause unevenwear patterns to develop across the tire tread.These abnormal wear patterns will reduce treadlife resulting in a need for earlier tire replace-ment. Under-inflation also increases tire rollingresistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

223


Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortableride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and un-comfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle andcan produce a feeling of sluggish response orover responsiveness in the steering.

Unequal tire pressures from side to side may causeerratic and unpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side maycause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of thedriver’s side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a goodquality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do notmake a visual judgement when determiningproper inflation. Tires may look properly in-flated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visibledamage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt from en-tering the valve stem, which could damagethe valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard arealways “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tireinflation pressure is defined as the tire pressureafter the vehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)after a three hour period. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximum infla-tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to awide range of outdoor temperatures, as tirepressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperaturechange. Keep this in mind when checking tirepressure inside a garage, especially in thewinter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) thenthe cold tire inflation pressure should be in-creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outsidetemperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOTreduce this normal pressure build up or your tirepressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High SpeedOperationThe manufacturer advocates driving at safespeeds and within posted speed limits. Wherespeed limits or conditions are such that thevehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-hicle loading may be required for high-speedvehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tireor original equipment vehicle dealer for recom-mended safe operating speeds, loading andcold tire inflation pressures.

224


WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them to fail.You could have a serious collision. Do notdrive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca-pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph(120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types oftires on your vehicle will cause your vehicleto handle poorly. The instability could causea collision. Always use radial ply tires in setsof four. Never combine them with other typesof tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re-paired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat,

• The damage is only on the tread section ofyour tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)and

• The puncture is no greater than ¼" (6 mm)

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairsand additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires thathave experienced a loss of pressure should bereplaced immediately with another Run Flat tireof identical size and service description (LoadIndex and Speed Code).

Tire TypesAll Season Tires – If EquippedAll Season tires provide traction for all seasons(spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levelsmay vary between different all season tires. Allseason tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use

all season tires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires – IfEquippedSummer tires provide traction in both wet anddry conditions, and are not intended to bedriven in snow or on ice. Summer tires will notcontain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Usesummer tires only in sets of four; failure to do somay adversely affect the safety and handling ofyour vehicle.

Snow TiresSome areas of the country require the use ofsnow tires during the winter. Snow tires can beidentified by a mountain/snowflake symbol onthe tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent insize and type to the original equipment tires.Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

225


Snow tires generally have lower speed ratingsthan what was originally equipped with yourvehicle and should not be operated at sustainedspeeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speedsabove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to originalequipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec-ommended safe operating speeds, loading andcold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance onice, skid and traction capability on wet or drysurfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should be checkedbefore using these tire types.

Run Flat TiresRun Flat tires allow you the capability to drive50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after arapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss ofinflation is referred to as the run flat mode. A runflat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressureis of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flattire reaches the run flat mode it has limiteddriving capabilities and needs to be replacedimmediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loadedat full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is inthe run flat mode.

See the Tire Pressure Monitoring Section formore information.

Spare Tires

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through an auto-matic car wash with a compact, full size orlimited-use temporary spare installed. Dam-age to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped TireAnd Wheel – If EquippedYour vehicle may be equipped with a spare tireand wheel equivalent in look and function to theoriginal equipment tire and wheel found on thefront or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tiremay be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.If your vehicle has this option refer to an autho-rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-tion pattern.

Compact Spare Tire – If EquippedThe compact spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. You can identify if your vehicle isequipped with a compact spare by looking atthe spare tire description on the Tire and Load-ing Information Placard located on the driver’sside door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.Compact spare tire descriptions begin with theletter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life the originalequipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-portunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mounta conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,since the wheel is designed specifically for thecompact spare tire. Do not install more than onecompact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle atany given time.

226


WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emer-gency use only. With these spares, do notdrive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-rary use spares have limited tread life. Whenthe tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,the temporary use spare tire needs to bereplaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,which apply to your spare. Failure to do socould result in spare tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Full Size Spare – If EquippedThe full size spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. This tire may look like the originallyequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporary use fullsize spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it isnot the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-nity.

Limited-Use Spare – If EquippedThe limited-use spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire is identified by alabel located on the limited-use spare wheel.This label contains the driving limitations for thisspare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since itis not the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-nity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited-use spare tireaffects vehicle handling. With this tire, do notdrive more than the speed listed on thelimit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to thecold tire inflation pressures listed on yourTire and Loading Information Placard lo-cated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear

(Continued)


edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire at the firstopportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.Failure to do so could result in loss of vehiclecontrol.

Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-tions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 secondscontinuously without stopping when you arestuck.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheel speeds maycause tire damage or failure. A tire couldexplode and injure someone. Do not spin your

(Continued)

227



vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)for more than 30 seconds continuously whenyou are stuck, and do not let anyone near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in the original equip-ment tires to help you in determining when yourtires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom ofthe tread grooves. They will appear as bandswhen the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm).When the tread is worn to the tread wearindicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer toreplacement tires in this section for furtherinformation.

Life Of TireThe service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating ofV or higher, and summer tires typically havea reduced tread life. Rotation of these tiresper the vehicle maintenance schedule ishighly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting in seri-ous injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible. Protecttires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balanceof many characteristics. They should be in-spected regularly for wear and correct cold tireinflation pressure. The manufacturer stronglyrecommends that you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in size, quality and performance whenreplacement is needed. Refer to the paragraphon “Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tireand Loading Information placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the size designation of1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

228


your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol foryour tire will be found on the original equipmenttire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart examplefound in the Tire Safety Information section ofthis manual for more information relating to theLoad Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tiresor two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tirecan seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. Ifyou ever replace a wheel, make sure that thewheel’s specifications match those of the origi-nal wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorizedtire or original equipment dealer with any ques-tions you may have on tire specifications orcapability. Failure to use equivalent replace-ment tires may adversely affect the safety,handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating otherthan that specified for your vehicle. Somecombinations of unapproved tires andwheels may change suspension dimen-sions and performance characteristics, re-sulting in changes to steering, handling,and braking of your vehicle. This cancause unpredictable handling and stressto steering and suspension components.You could lose control and have a collisionresulting in serious injury or death. Useonly the tire and wheel sizes with loadratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)


• Never use a tire with a smaller load indexor capacity, other than what was originallyequipped on your vehicle. Using a tire witha smaller load index could result in tireoverloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability can re-sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve-hicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-ent size may result in false speedometer andodometer readings.

229


TIRE ROTATIONRECOMMENDATIONSThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicleoperate at different loads and perform differentsteering, handling, and braking functions. Forthese reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotationof tires. The benefits of rotation are especiallyworthwhile with aggressive tread designs suchas those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotationwill increase tread life, help to maintain mud,snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute toa smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals. More frequentrotation is permissible if desired. The reasonsfor any rapid or unusual wear should be cor-rected prior to rotation being performed.

NOTE:The premium Tire Pressure Monitor Systemwill automatically locate the pressure valuesdisplayed in the correct vehicle positionfollowing a tire rotation.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following diagram.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORSYSTEM (TPMS)NOTE:For vehicles equipped with run flat tires —When the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of14 psi (96 kPa) or lower, always check tirepressure and replace the tire at the firstopportunity. At inflation pressure of/or be-low 14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flatmode of operation. In this condition, it isrecommended a vehicle maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of50 miles (80 km). Chrysler Group LLC doesnot recommend using the run flat featurewhile driving a vehicle loaded at full capac-ity or towing a trailer.The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)will warn the driver of a low tire pressure basedon the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.

Tire Rotation

230


The tire pressure will vary with temperature byabout 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). Thismeans that when the outside temperature de-creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tirepressure should always be set based on coldinflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tirepressure after the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Referto “Tires – General Information” in “Startingand Operating” for information on how toproperly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tirepressure will also increase as the vehicle isdriven - this is normal and there should be noadjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tirepressure if the tire pressure falls below the lowpressure warning threshold for any reason,including low temperature effects, or naturalpressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of lowtire pressure as long as the condition exists,and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at orabove recommended cold tire pressure. Oncethe low tire pressure warning has been illumi-nated, the tire pressure must be increased to

the recommended cold tire pressure in order forthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to beturned off. The system will automatically updateand the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lightwill extinguish once the updated tire pressureshave been received. The vehicle may need tobe driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle has a recommendedcold (parked for more than three hours) tirepressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambienttemperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measuredtire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperaturedrop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pres-sure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tirepressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ONthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driv-ing the vehicle may cause the tire pressure torise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will stillbe ON. In this situation, the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only afterthe tires have been inflated to the vehicle’srecommended cold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels. TPMSpressures have been established for thetire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-sirable system operation or sensor dam-age may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size,type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels cancause sensor damage. Do not use after-market tire sealants or balance beads ifyour vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, asdamage to the sensors may result.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt fromentering the valve stem, which could dam-age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

231


NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-vide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tirepressure gauge while adjusting your tirepressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure using an accurate tire gauge,even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affecttire pressure, and the TPMS will monitorthe actual tire pressure in the tire.

Premium SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres-sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel aspart of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE:It is particularly important, for you to regu-larly check the tire pressure in all of yourtires and to maintain the proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con-sists of the following components:

1. Receiver Module

2. Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

3. Various Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemMessages, which display in the Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC), and a graphicdisplaying tire pressures

4. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring LowPressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight will illuminate in the instrumentcluster, and an audible chime will beactivated, when one or more of the

four active road tire pressures are low. In addi-tion, the EVIC will display one or more LowPressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, RightFront, Right Rear) for a minimum of five sec-onds, and a graphic display of the pressurevalue(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

NOTE:Your system can be set to display pressureunits in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

232


Should a low tire condition occur on any of thefour active road tire(s), you should stop as soonas possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is“flashing” on the graphic display to the vehicle’srecommended cold tire pressure. The systemwill automatically update, the graphic display ofthe pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” andthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willextinguish once the updated tire pressure(s)have been received. The vehicle may need tobe driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) to receive this information.

SERVICE TPM SYSTEM WarningThe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willflash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain onsolid when a system fault is detected. Thesystem fault will also sound a chime. The EVICwill display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-sage for a minimum of five seconds. This mes-sage is then followed by a graphic display, with“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicatingwhich Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is notbeing received.

NOTE:Your system can be set to display pressureunits in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence willrepeat, providing the system fault still exists. Ifthe system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pres-sure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longerflash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" messagewill not be present, and a pressure value will bedisplayed instead of dashes. A system fault canoccur by any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same Radio Fre-quencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMsensors.

The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPMSYSTEM" message for a minimum of five sec-onds when a system fault is detected possiblyrelated to the trigger component an incorrectsensor location fault. In this case, the "SER-VICE TPM SYSTEM" message is then followed

233


by a graphic display, with pressure values stillshown. This indicates the pressure values arestill being received from the TPM Sensors butthey may not be located in the correct vehicleposition. However, the system still needs to beserviced as long as the "SERVICE TPM SYS-TEM" message exists.

NOTE:There is no tire pressure monitoring sensorin the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able tomonitor the tire pressure. If you install thespare tire in place of a road tire that has apressure below the low-pressure warninglimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, theTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willremain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVICwill still display a “flashing” pressure valuein the graphic display. After driving the ve-hicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light will flash on and off for 75 secondsand then remain on solid. In addition, theEVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM�

message for three seconds and then displaydashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, achime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitor-ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for75 seconds and then remain on solid, andthe EVIC will display a �SERVICE TPM SYS-TEM� message for three seconds and thendisplay dashes (- -) in place of the pressurevalue. Once you repair or replace the origi-nal road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle inplace of the spare tire, the TPMS will updateautomatically.

In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVICwill display a new pressure value instead ofdashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is belowthe low-pressure warning limit in any of the fouractive road tires. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

TPMS DeactivationThe TPMS can be deactivated if replacing allfour wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) withwheel and tire assemblies that do not haveTPMS Sensors, such as when installing winterwheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle Todeactivate the TPMS, first, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tiresnot equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for20 minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph). The TPMSwill chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain on andthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-TEM” message and then display dashes (--) inplace of the pressure values. Beginning with thenext ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will nolonger chime or display the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message in the EVIC but dashes (--)will remain in place of the pressure values.

234


To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheeland tire assemblies (road tires) with tiresequipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive thevehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h(15 mph). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM TelltaleLight" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and thenturn off, and the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message. The EVIC will also displaypressure values in place of the dashes. On thenext ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPMSYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed aslong as no system fault exists.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases isdeadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-vent carbon monoxide poisoning:• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain

carbon monoxide, a colorless and odor-less gas, which can kill. Never run theengine in a closed area, such as a garage,

(Continued)


and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. Ifthe vehicle is stopped in an open area withthe engine running for more than a shortperiod, adjust the ventilation system toforce fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide withproper maintenance. Have the exhaustsystem inspected every time the vehicle israised. Have any abnormal conditions re-paired promptly. Until repaired, drive withall side windows fully open.

• Keep the trunk closed when driving yourvehicle to prevent carbon monoxide andother poisonous exhaust gases from en-tering the vehicle.

6.4L EngineYour vehicle is designed to meet all emissionsregulations and provide excellent fuel economyand performance when using high-quality un-leaded gasoline having an octane rating of 91 to98. The manufacturer recommends the use of91 octane or higher for optimum performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is notharmful to your engine. However, continuedheavy spark knock at high speeds can causedamage and immediate service is required.Poor quality gasoline can cause problems suchas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If youexperience these symptoms, try another brandof gasoline before considering service for thevehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide haveissued and endorsed consistent gasoline speci-fications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC)which define fuel properties necessary to de-liver enhanced emissions, performance, anddurability for your vehicle. The manufacturerrecommends the use of gasolines that meet theWWFC specifications, if they are available.

235


Methanol(Methyl or Wood Alcohol) is used in a variety ofconcentrations when blended with unleadedgasoline. You may find fuels containing 3% ormore methanol along with other alcohols calledcosolvents. Problems that result from usingmethanol/gasoline or Ethanol blends are not theresponsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBEis an oxygenate made from Methanol, it doesnot have the negative effects of Methanol.

CAUTION!

Do not use gasolines containing Methanol orEthanol. Use of these blends may result instarting and driveability problems and maydamage critical fuel system components.

EthanolThe manufacturer recommends that your ve-hicle be operated on fuel containing no morethan 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from areputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex-ceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuelwith abnormal properties. It should also benoted that an increase in fuel consumption

should be expected when using ethanol-blended fuels, due to the lower energy contentof ethanol. Problems that result from usingmethanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol blends arenot the responsibility of the manufacturer. WhileMTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, itdoes not have the negative effects of Methanol.

CAUTION!

Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than10% may result in engine malfunction, start-ing and operating difficulties, and materialsdegradation. These adverse effects couldresult in permanent damage to your vehicle.

Clean Air GasolineMany gasolines are now being blended to con-tribute to cleaner air, especially in those areaswhere air pollution levels are high. These newblends provide a cleaner burning fuel and someare referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”

The manufacturer supports these efforts towardcleaner air. You can help by using these blendsas they become available.

Materials Added To FuelBesides using unleaded gasoline with theproper octane rating, gasolines that containdetergents, corrosion and stability additives arerecommended. Using gasolines that have theseadditives will help improve fuel economy, re-duce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-mance.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaningagents should be avoided. Many of these ma-terials intended for gum and varnish removalmay contain active solvents or similar ingredi-ents. These can harm fuel system gasket anddiaphragm materials.

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases isdeadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-vent carbon monoxide poisoning:• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain

carbon monoxide, a colorless and odor-less gas which can kill. Never run theengine in a closed area, such as a garage,

(Continued)

236



and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. Ifthe vehicle is stopped in an open area withthe engine running for more than a shortperiod, adjust the ventilation system toforce fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide withproper maintenance. Have the exhaustsystem inspected every time the vehicle israised. Have any abnormal conditions re-paired promptly. Until repaired, drive withall side windows fully open.

• Keep the liftgate closed when driving yourvehicle to prevent carbon monoxide andother poisonous exhaust gases from en-tering the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (lo-cated under the headlamp switch).

2. Open the fuel filler door.

NOTE:In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent thefuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightlypush on the fuel door to break the ice buildupand re-release the fuel door using the insiderelease button. Do not pry on the door.

3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper doorinside the pipe seals the system.

4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doorwhile refueling.

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

Fuel Filler Door

237


NOTE:Only the correct size nozzle opens thelatches allowing the flapper door to open.

5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuelnozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.

6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fueldoor.Emergency Gas Can Refueling

• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.

• A funnel is provided to open the flapper doorto allow emergency refueling with a gas can.

• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storagearea.

• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening asthe fuel nozzle.

• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapperdoor open.

• Pour fuel into funnel opening.

• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off priorto putting back in the spare tire storage area.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not“top off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in ornear the vehicle when the fuel door is openor the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running.This is in violation of most state and fed-eral fire regulations and may cause the“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into aportable container that is inside of a ve-hicle. You could be burned. Always placefuel containers on the ground while filling.

Emergency Fuel Filler Door ReleaseIf you are unable to open the fuel filler door, usethe fuel filler door emergency release.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Push down on the inboard edge of the leftstorage bin, this will pop up the outboard edge.

3. Grab popped up outboard edge with otherhand to disengage snaps.

4. Remove the storage bin.

5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door,push the release cable back to the home position tore-seat the fuel door latch to the closed position.

Release Cable

238


NOTE:If the fuel door does not latch after the manualrelease cable has been activated, the actuatorlatch should be manually returned to theclosed position.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification LabelAs required by National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration regulations, your vehicle has acertification label affixed to the driver’s side dooror pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manu-facture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear,and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this labeland indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manu-facture. The bar code that appears on the bottomof the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total permissible weight ofyour vehicle including driver, passengers, ve-hicle, options and cargo. The label also speci-fies maximum capacities of front and rear axlesystems (GAWR). Total load must be limited soGVWR and front and rear GAWR are not ex-ceeded.

PayloadThe payload of a vehicle is defined as theallowable load weight a truck can carry, includ-ing the weight of the driver, all passengers,options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum permissible load onthe front and rear axles. The load must bedistributed in the cargo area so that the GAWRof each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the compo-nents in the system with the lowest load carry-ing capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).Heavier axles or suspension componentssometimes specified by purchasers for in-creased durability does not necessarily in-crease the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire SizeThe tire size on the Vehicle Certification Labelrepresents the actual tire size on your vehicle.Replacement tires must be equal to the loadcapacity of this tire size.

Rim SizeThis is the rim size that is appropriate for the tiresize listed.

Inflation PressureThis is the cold tire inflation pressure for yourvehicle for all loading conditions up to fullGAWR.

Curb WeightThe curb weight of a vehicle is defined as thetotal weight of the vehicle with all fluids, includ-ing vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, andwith no occupants or cargo loaded into thevehicle. The front and rear curb weight valuesare determined by weighing your vehicle on acommercial scale before any occupants orcargo are added.

239


LoadingThe actual total weight and the weight of thefront and rear of your vehicle at the ground canbest be determined by weighing it when it isloaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on acommercial scale to insure that the GVWR hasnot been exceeded. The weight on the front andrear of the vehicle should then be determinedseparately to be sure that the load is properlydistributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR ofeither the front or rear axles has been exceededbut the total load is within the specified GVWR.If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear orrear to front as appropriate until the specifiedweight limitations are met. Store the heavieritems down low and be sure that the weight isdistributed equally. Stow all loose items se-curely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an ad-verse effect on the way your vehicle steers andhandles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR or the maximum front and rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, or it can change the way your vehiclehandles. This could cause you to lose con-trol. Also overloading can shorten the life ofyour vehicle.

TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find safety tips andinformation on limits to the type of towing youcan reasonably do with your vehicle. Beforetowing a trailer, carefully review this informationto tow your load as efficiently and safely aspossible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warrantycoverage, follow the requirements and recom-mendations in this manual concerning vehiclesused for trailer towing.

Common Towing DefinitionsThe following trailer towing related definitionswill assist you in understanding the followinginformation:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of yourvehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargoand trailer tongue weight. The total load must belimited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus theweight of all cargo, consumables and equip-ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or onthe trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"condition. The recommended way to measureGTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on avehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailermust be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)The GCWR is the total permissible weight ofyour vehicle and trailer when weighed in com-bination.

NOTE:The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)allowance for the presence of a driver.

240


Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the frontand rear axles. Distribute the load over the frontand rear axles evenly. Make sure that you donot exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed themaximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerousdriving condition can result if either rating isexceeded. You could lose control of thevehicle and have an accident.

Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)The TW is the downward force exerted on thehitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it shouldnot be more than 5% of the trailer load. Youmust consider this as part of the load on yourvehicle.

WARNING!

An improperly adjusted hitch system mayreduce handling, stability and braking perfor-mance and could result in an accident. Con-sult with your hitch and trailer manufactureror a reputable trailer/caravan dealer for ad-ditional information.

Frontal AreaThe frontal area is the maximum height multi-plied by the maximum width of the front of atrailer.

Breakaway Cable AttachmentEuropean braking regulations for braked trailersup to 7,700 lbs (3 500 kg), require trailers to befitted with either a secondary coupling or break-away cable.

The recommended location for attaching thenormal trailer’s breakaway cable is in thestamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitchreceiver.

With Attachment Point

• For detachable tow bar pass the cablethrough the attachment point and clip it backonto itself or attach the clip directly to thedesignated point.

Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method

241


• For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directlyto the designated point. This alternative mustbe specifically permitted by the trailer manu-facturer since the clip may not be sufficientlystrong for use in the way.

Without Attachment Points

• For detachable ball tow bar, you must followthe recommended manufacturer or supplierprocedure.

• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable aroundthe neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cablelike this, use a single loop only.

Fixed Ball Clip Loop MethodDetachable Ball Neck Loop Method

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method

242


Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission

GCWR (Gross CombinedWt. Rating)

Frontal Area Max. GTW (GrossTrailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.(See Note)

6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs (5 727 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,500 lbs (2 955 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE:The trailer tongue weight must be consid-ered as part of the combined weight ofoccupants and cargo, and should never ex-ceed the weight referenced on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Trailer And Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60% of the weight inthe front of the trailer. Loads balanced over thewheels, or heavier in the rear, can cause thetrailer to sway severely side-to-side which willcause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.Failure to load trailers heavier in front is thecause of many trailer accidents. Never exceedthe maximum tongue weight stamped on yourtrailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computingthe weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:

• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo orequipment put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:Remember that everything put into or on thetrailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,additional factory-installed options, or au-thorized dealer-installed options, must beconsidered as part of the total load on yourvehicle. Refer to the tire loading informationplacard located on the drivers door pillar forthe maximum combined weight of occu-pants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicledrivetrain components, the following guidelinesare recommended.

243


CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle isdriven. The engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)that a trailer is towed, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps the engine andother parts of the vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Mainte-nance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Sched-ule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Whentowing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR orGCWR ratings.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Fol-low these guidelines to make your trailertowing as safe as possible:

(Continued)


• Make certain that the load is secured in thetrailer and will not shift during travel. Whentrailering cargo that is not fully secured, dy-namic load shifts can occur that may bedifficult for the driver to control. You could losecontrol of your vehicle and have a collision.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, donot overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-loading can cause a loss of control, poorperformance or damage to brakes, axle,engine, transmission, steering, suspen-sion, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used be-tween your vehicle and trailer. Always con-nect the chains to the hook retainers of thevehicle hitch. Cross the chains under thetrailer tongue and allow enough slack forturning corners.

(Continued)


• Vehicles with trailers should not be parkedon a grade. When parking, apply the park-ing brake on the tow vehicle. Put the towvehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the trans-fer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, blockor "chock" the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.• Total weight must be distributed be-

tween the tow vehicle and the trailersuch that the following four ratings arenot exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailerhitch utilized .

244


Towing Requirements – Tires

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essentialto the safe and satisfactory operation of yourvehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-tion” in “Starting and Operating” for propertire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflationpressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tiredamage before towing a trailer. Refer to“Tires – General Information” in “Starting andOperating” for proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – Gen-eral Information” in “Starting and Operating”for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-placing tires with a higher load carrying ca-pacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWRand GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys-tem or vacuum system of your vehicle withthat of the trailer. This could cause inad-equate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically-actuated trailer brake con-troller is required when towing a trailer withelectronically-actuated brakes. When towinga trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic brakecontroller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailersover 1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required fortrailers in excess of 1,654 lbs (750 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi-cle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overloadyour brake system and cause it to fail. Youmight not have brakes when you needthem and could have an accident.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stoppingdistance. When towing, you should allow foradditional space between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front of you. Failure to do socould result in an accident.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights AndWiringWhenever you pull a trailer, regardless of thetrailer size, stop lights and turn signals on thetrailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package includes a 13 pinwiring harness. Use a factory approved trailerharness and connector.

NOTE:Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicleswiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete tothe vehicle but you must mate the harness to atrailer connector.

245


PinNumber

Function WireColor

1 Left Turn Signal Black/White

2 Rear Fog Light White3 a Ground/Common

Return for Contacts(Pins) 1 and 2 and

4 to 8

Brown

4 Right Turn Signal Black/Green

PinNumber

Function WireColor

5 Right Rear Position,Side Marker Lights,and Rear Registra-tion Plate Illumina-

tion Device. b

Green/Red

6 Stop Lights Black/Red

7 Left Rear Position,Side Marker Lights,and Rear Registra-tion Plate Illumina-

tion Device. b

Green/Black

8 Reverse lights Blue/Red

9 Permanent PowerSupply (+12V)

Red

10 Power Supply Con-trolled by Ignition

Switch (+12V)

Yellow

11 a Return for Contact(Pin) 10

Yellow/Brown

PinNumber

Function WireColor

12 Reserve for FutureAllocation

–

13 a Return for Contact(Pin) 9

Red/Brown

NOTE:The allocation pin 12 has been changedfrom “Coding for coupled Trailer” to“Reserve for Future Allocation.”a The three return circuits shall not beconnected electrically in the trailer.b The rear position registration plate illumi-nation device shall be connected such thatno light of the device has a commonconnection with both pins 5 and 7.

13–Pin Connector

246


Towing TipsBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning,stopping and backing the trailer in an area awayfrom heavy traffic.

Automatic TransmissionThe DRIVE range can be selected when towing.The transmission controls include a drive strat-egy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.However, if frequent shifting does occur while inDRIVE, select TOW mode, or use the PaddleShift switches to manually select a lower gear.

NOTE:Using a lower gear while operating the ve-hicle under heavy loading conditions willimprove performance and extend transmis-sion life by reducing excessive shifting andheat build up. This action will also providebetter engine braking.

TOW Mode

To reduce the potential for automatic transmis-sion overheating, select TOW mode when driv-ing in hilly areas, or select a lower gear (usingthe Paddle Shift switches) on more severegrades.

Paddle Shift Mode

• When using the Paddle Shift switches, selectthe highest gear that allows for adequateperformance and avoids frequent downshifts.For example, choose “5” if the desired speedcan be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” ifneeded to maintain the desired speed.

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoidcontinuous driving at high RPM. Reducevehicle speed as necessary to avoid ex-tended driving at high RPM. Return to ahigher gear or vehicle speed when grade androad conditions allow.

Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experi-ence speed drops greater than 10 mph(16 km/h), disengage until you can get backto cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with lightloads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling SystemTo reduce potential for engine and transmissionoverheating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift thetransmission into NEUTRAL and increase en-gine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

Trailer Hitch Attaching PointsYour vehicle will require extra equipment to towa trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer towhitch must be attached to your vehicle using theprovided attaching points on the vehicle’sframe. Refer to the following chart to determinethe accurate attaching points. Other equipment,such as trailer sway controls and braking equip-ment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipmentand low profile mirrors, may also be required orstrongly recommended.

247


Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points AndOverhang Dimensions

Fixed, Detach andRetractable Hitch

A 1.85 ft. (565 mm)

B 2.09 ft. (636 mm)

C 2.32 ft. (707 mm)

D 2.4 ft. (733 mm)

E 1.62 ft. (494 mm)

F 1.47 ft. (447 mm)

RECREATIONAL TOWING(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)Recreational towing is not allowed.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground can cause severe transmissionand/or transfer case damage. Damage fromimproper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed orvehicle trailer provided all four wheels areOFF the ground.

248


6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250• JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

• Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251• Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253• Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254• Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254• Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255• Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255• Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255• Road Tire Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

• EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .259• TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259• FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260• MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

249


HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is locatedon the switch bank just above the climatecontrols.

Press the switch to turn on the HazardWarning flasher. When the switch isactivated, all directional turn signals

will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic ofan emergency. Press the switch a second timeto turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and itshould not be used when the vehicle is inmotion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled andit is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will con-tinue to operate even though the ignition isplaced in the OFF position.

NOTE:With extended use the Hazard Warningflashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you canreduce the potential for overheating by takingthe appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place thetransmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-crease the engine idle speed.

NOTE:There are steps that you can take to slowdown an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn itoff. The A/C system adds heat to theengine cooling system and turning theA/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature controlto maximum heat, the mode control tofloor and the blower control to high. Thisallows the heater core to act as a supple-ment to the radiator and aids in removingheat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-age your vehicle. If the temperature gaugereads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turnedoff until the pointer drops back into the normalrange. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), andyou hear continuous chimes, turn the engineoff immediately and call for service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steam com-ing from under the hood, do not open thehood until the radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

250


JUMP-STARTINGIf your vehicle has a discharged battery it can bejump-started using a set of jumper cables and abattery in another vehicle or by using a portablebattery booster pack. Jump-starting can be danger-ous if done improperly so please follow the proce-dures in this section carefully.

NOTE:When using a portable battery booster packfollow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions and precautions.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack orany other booster source with a system voltagegreater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,starter motor, alternator or electrical systemmay occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery isfrozen. It could rupture or explode and causepersonal injury.

Preparations For Jump-StartThe battery in your vehicle is located under thepassenger’s front seat. There are remote loca-tions located under the hood to assist in jump-starting.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fanwhenever the hood is raised. It can startanytime the ignition switch is ON. You canbe injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

Remote Battery Posts

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered withprotective cap)2 — Remote Negative (-) Post

251



• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,watch bands and bracelets that couldmake an inadvertent electrical contact.You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that canburn your skin or eyes and generate hy-drogen gas which is flammable and explo-sive. Keep open flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

NOTE:Be sure that the disconnected ends of thecables do not touch while still connected tothe other vehicle.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatictransmission into PARK and turn the ignition toLOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-sary electrical accessories.

3. Remove the protective cover over the re-mote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward onthe cover to remove it.

4. If using another vehicle to jump-start thebattery, park the vehicle within the jumpercables reach, set the parking brake and makesure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other asthis could establish a ground connection andpersonal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could resultin personal injury or property damage due tobattery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could re-sult in damage to the charging system of thebooster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

NOTE:Make sure at all times that unused ends ofjumper cables are not contacting each otheror either vehicle while making connections.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumpercable to the remote positive (+) post of thedischarged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumpercable to the negative (-) post of the boosterbattery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post ofthe vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Do not connect the cable to the negative post(-) of the discharged battery. The resultingelectrical spark could cause the battery toexplode and could result in personal injury.

252


5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a few min-utes, and then start the engine in the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

Once the engine is started, remove the jumpercables in the reverse sequence:

6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the remote negative (-) post of the dis-charged vehicle.

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of thejumper cable from the negative (-) post of thebooster battery.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.

9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumpercable from the remote positive (+) post of thedischarged vehicle.

10. Reinstall the protective cover over the re-mote positive (+) battery post of the dischargedvehicle.If frequent jump-starting is required to start yourvehicle you should have the battery and charg-ing system tested at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’s bat-tery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, the vehi-cle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to de-grade battery life and/or prevent the enginefrom starting.

JACKING AND TIRECHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the sideof the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pullfar enough off the road to avoid the dangerof being hit when operating the jack orchanging the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger-ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack andfall on you. You could be crushed. Neverput any part of your body under a vehiclethat is on a jack. If you need to get under araised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while thevehicle is on a jack.

(Continued)

253



• The jack is designed to be used as a toolfor changing tires only. The jack should notbe used to lift the vehicle for service pur-poses. The vehicle should be jacked on afirm level surface only. Avoid ice or slipperyareas.

Run Flat TiresThis vehicle is equipped with a compact sparealong with run flat tires. Although the tires aredesigned with a “run flat” feature that allows thevehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles(80 km) at 55 mph (88 km/h) immediate serviceshould be obtained.

NOTE:The compact spare tire is to be used for therear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, movethe rear tire to the front and use the compactspare on the rear.

WARNING!

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” isilluminated. Vehicle handling and brakingmay be reduced. You could have a colli-sion and be severely or fatally injured.

• Do not tow a trailer when using the com-pact spare tire.

Jack LocationThe scissor-type jack and tire changing toolsare located in rear cargo area, below the loadfloor.

NOTE:The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System islocated on top of the spare tire. If yourvehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuelcan is needed, insert the funnel into the fillerneck and proceed to fill the vehicle. Formore information on the Cap-Less Fuel Sys-tem refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting AndOperating” in this manual.

Compact Spare Tire Label

Jack Storage Location

254


Spare Tire StowageThe spare tire is stowed under the load floor inthe rear cargo area and is secured to the bodywith a special wing nut.

Preparations For Jacking1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side ofthe vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull farenough off the road to avoid being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever into PARK.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite ofthe jacking position. Forexample, if changingthe right front tire, blockthe left rear wheel.

NOTE:Passengers should not remain in the vehiclewhen the vehicle is being jacked.

7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® re-fer to “Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “StartingAnd Operating” for further information on dis-abling automatic leveling.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warningsto help prevent personal injury or damage toyour vehicle:• Always park on a firm, level surface as far

from the edge of the roadway as possiblebefore raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be raised.• Set the parking brake firmly and set an

automatic transmission in PARK.• Never start or run the engine with the

vehicle on a jack.• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it

is on a jack.• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on

a jack. If you need to get under a raisedvehicle, take it to a service center where itcan be raised on a lift.”

(Continued)

255



• Only use the jack in the positions indicatedand for lifting this vehicle during a tirechange.

• If working on or near a roadway, be ex-tremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,are securely stowed, spares must bestowed with the valve stem facing theground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jackingon locations other than those indicated in theJacking Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools fromstorage.

2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lugnuts by turning them to the left, one turn, whilethe wheel is still on the ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.

4. For the front axle, place the jack on the bodyflange just behind the front tire as indicated bythe triangular lift point symbol on the sill mold-ing. Do not raise the vehicle until you aresure the jack is fully engaged.

Jack Warning Label Jack and Tool Assembly

Jacking Locations

256


5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot onthe rear tie-down bracket, just forward of therear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift pointsymbol on the sill molding). Do not raise thevehicle until you are sure the jack is fullyengaged.

6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screwclockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tirejust clears the surface and enough clearance isobtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tirelift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessarycan make the vehicle less stable. It could slipoff the jack and hurt someone near it. Raisethe vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding

Front Jacking Location

Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding

Rear Jacking Location

257


8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicleand install the lug nuts with the cone-shapedend toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valvestem facing outward. The vehicle could bedamaged if the spare tire is mounted incor-rectly.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off thejack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until thevehicle has been lowered. Failure to followthis warning may result in personal injury.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screwcounterclockwise, and remove the jack andwheel blocks.

10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push downon the wrench while at the end of the handle forincreased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in astar pattern until each nut has been tightenedtwice. The correct wheel nut tightness is 110ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the correcttightness, have them checked with a torquewrench by your authorized dealer or at a servicestation.

11. Lower the jack to the fully closed positionand return it and the tools to the proper posi-tions in the foam tray.

12. Remove the small center cap and securelystore the road wheel in the cargo area.

13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire re-paired as soon as possible, properly secure thespare tire with the special wing nut torqued to3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the jack and tool kitfoam tray, and latch the rear load floor cover.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collisionor hard stop could endanger the occupants ofthe vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and thespare tire in the places provided. Have thedeflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced imme-diately.

Mounting Spare Tire

Stowed Spare

258


Road Tire Installation1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the coneshaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightlytighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off thejack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until thevehicle has been lowered. Failure to followthis warning may result in personal injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turningthe jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down onthe wrench while at the end of the handle forincreased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in astar pattern until each nut has been tightenedtwice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about thecorrect tightness, have them checked with atorque wrench by your authorized dealer orservice station.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nuttorque with a torque wrench to ensure that alllug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —IF EQUIPPEDIf your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, therewill be one in the rear and two mounted on thefront of the vehicle. The rear hook will belocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

NOTE:For off-road recovery, it is recommended touse both of the front tow hooks to minimizethe risk of damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuckvehicle. Chains may break, causing seri-ous injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling withtow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-gaged, causing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, torescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do notuse tow hooks for tow truck hookup or high-way towing. You could damage your vehicle.

TOW EYESYour vehicle is equipped with tow eyes, whichare mounted in the front and the rear.

CAUTION!

Tow eyes are for emergency use only, torescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not usetow eyes for tow truck hookup or highwaytowing. You could damage your vehicle. Towstraps are recommended when towing thevehicle; chains may cause vehicle damage.

259


WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with toweyes. Tow straps and chains may break,causing serious injury.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand orsnow, it can often be moved using a rockingmotion. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear the area around the front wheels. Pressand hold the lock button on the shift lever. Thenshift back and forth between DRIVE and RE-VERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.

NOTE:Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE canonly be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmissionremains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 sec-onds, you must press the brake pedal toengage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-sure that will maintain the rocking motion with-out spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:Press the �ESC Off� switch (if necessary), toplace the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system in �Partial Off� mode, before rockingthe vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-trol” in “Starting And Operating” for furtherinformation. Once the vehicle has beenfreed, press the �ESC Off� switch again torestore �ESC On� mode.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels maylead to transmission overheating and failure.Allow the engine to idle with the transmissionin NEUTRAL for at least one minute after everyfive rocking-motion cycles. This will minimizeoverheating and reduce the risk of transmis-sion failure during prolonged efforts to free astuck vehicle.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shiftingbetween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spinthe wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), ordrivetrain damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheelstoo fast may lead to transmission overheat-ing and failure. It can also damage the tires.Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmissionshifting occurring).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheel speeds maycause damage, or even failure, of the axle andtires. A tire could explode and injure someone.Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-onds continuously without stopping when youare stuck and do not let anyone near a spin-ning wheel, no matter what the speed.

260


MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applyingthe parking brake, before activating theManual Park Release. Activating the ManualPark Release will allow your vehicle to rollaway if it is not secured by the parking brakeor by proper connection to a tow vehicle.Activating the Manual Park Release on anunsecured vehicle could lead to serious in-jury or death for those in or around thevehicle.

In order to move the vehicle in cases where thetransmission will not shift out of PARK (such asa dead battery), a Manual Park Release isavailable.

Follow these steps to use the Manual ParkRelease:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Open the center console and locate theManual Park Release cover, remove it by snap-ping the cover away from the console hinges.

3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push themetal latch in towards the tether strap.

Manual Park Release Cover

Release Latch

261


4. While the metal latch is the open position,simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strapuntil it clicks and releases out of the parkposition.

NOTE:To prevent the vehicle from rolling uninten-tionally, firmly apply the parking brake.

To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:

1. To disengage the Manual Park Release ap-ply tension upward while pushing the releaselatch towards the tether to unlock the lever.

2. Once the tension has been released and thelever has been unlocked be sure it is stowedproperly and locks into position.

NOTE:Be sure to replace the cover by snapping itback in place.Released Position Release Latch

Stowed Position

262


TOWING A DISABLEDVEHICLEThe manufacturer requires towing your vehiclewith all four wheels OFF the ground using aflatbed.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’sbattery is discharged, refer to “Manual ParkRelease” in this section for instructions on shift-ing the transmission out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!

• Towing this vehicle using any othermethod could result in extensive damageto the transfer case and/or transmission.

• Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

263


264


7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267• ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268• REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268• DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268• MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

• Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275• Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279• Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279• Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

265


• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280• Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . .282

• FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285• Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

• VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290• REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290• BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

• High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If Equipped . . . . . .291• Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292• Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292• Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292• Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . .293• Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293• Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294• Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

• FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295• FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

266


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Air Cleaner Filter2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

267


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTICSYSTEM (OBD II)Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticatedonboard diagnostic system called OBD II. Thissystem monitors the performance of the emis-sions, engine, and automatic transmission con-trol systems. When these systems are operat-ing properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well asengine emissions well within current govern-ment regulations.

If any of these systems require service, theOBD II system will turn on the “MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnos-tic codes and other information to assist yourservice technician in making repairs. Althoughyour vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer forservice as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on couldcause further damage to the emission con-trol system. It could also affect fueleconomy and drivability. The vehicle mustbe serviced before any emissions testscan be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine isrunning, severe catalytic converter dam-age and power loss will soon occur. Imme-diate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system de-termines that the fuel filler cap isloose, improperly installed, or dam-aged, a loose gascap indicator willdisplay in the EVIC telltale displayarea. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the

SELECT button to turn off the message. If theproblem continues, the message will appear thenext time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuelfiller cap may also turn on the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL).

REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highlyrecommended to ensure the designed perfor-mance. Damage or failures caused by the useof non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance andrepairs will not be covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified servicepersonnel, special tools, and equipment to per-form all service operations in an expert manner.Service Manuals are available which includedetailed service information for your vehicle.Refer to these Service Manuals before attempt-ing any procedure yourself.

268


NOTE:Intentional tampering with emissions con-trol systems may void your warranty andcould result in civil penalties being as-sessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Only do service workfor which you have the knowledge and theproper equipment. If you have any doubtabout your ability to perform a service job,take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESThe pages that follow contain the requiredmaintenance services determined by the engi-neers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified inthe fixed maintenance schedule, there are othercomponents which may require servicing orreplacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle orperform repairs and service when neces-sary could result in more costly repairs,damage to other components or negativelyimpact vehicle performance. Immediatelyhave potential malfunctions examined byan authorized dealer or qualified repaircenter.

• Your vehicle has been built with improvedfluids that protect the performance anddurability of your vehicle and also allowextended maintenance intervals. Do notuse chemical flushes in these componentsas the chemicals can damage your engine,transmission, power steering or air condi-tioning. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If aflush is needed because of componentmalfunction, use only the specified fluid forthe flushing procedure.

Engine OilChecking Oil LevelTo assure proper engine lubrication, the engineoil must be maintained at the correct level.Check the oil level at regular intervals, such asevery fuel stop. The best time to check theengine oil level is about five minutes after a fullywarmed engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on levelground will improve the accuracy of the oil levelreadings. Maintain the oil level in the “SAFE”range. Adding one quart of oil when the readingis at the bottom of the “SAFE” range will result inan oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range onthese engines.

NOTE:Fill engine oil one quart at a time.

CAUTION!

• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oilaeration or loss of oil pressure. This coulddamage your engine.

(Continued)

269



• Operating the engine with the oil levelsbelow the safe zone, or operating with oillevels that exceed the top of the safe zonemay cause engine damage.

Change Engine OilRefer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”for the proper maintenance interval.

Engine Oil Selection – Non ACEACategoriesFor best performance and maximum protectionunder all types of operating conditions, the manu-facturer only recommends full synthetic engineoils that meet the requirements of MS-12633. Themanufacturer recommends the use of a full syn-thetic 0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.

Engine Oil Selection – ACEA CategoriesFor countries that use the ACEA European OilCategories for Service Fill Oils, use full syn-thetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting the re-quirements of ACEA C3.

Engine Oil ViscositySAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in alloperating temperatures. Use only engine oilapproved to MS-12633.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. Forinformation on engine oil filler cap location, referto the “Engine Compartment” in this section.

Synthetic Engine OilsYou may use synthetic engine oils provided therecommended oil quality requirements are met,and the recommended maintenance intervalsfor oil and filter changes are followed.

Materials Added To Engine OilThe manufacturer strongly recommends againstthe addition of any additives (other than leakdetection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is anengineered product and its performance may beimpaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And OilFiltersCare should be taken in disposing of usedengine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Usedoil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, canpresent a problem to the environment. Contactyour authorized dealer, service station or gov-ernmental agency for advice on how and whereused oil and oil filters can be safely discarded inyour area.

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be replaced with anew filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter SelectionThis manufacturer’s engines have a full-flowtype oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-ment. The quality of replacement filters variesconsiderably. Only high quality filters should beused to assure most efficient service. MOPAR®engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter andare recommended.

270


Engine Air Cleaner FilterRefer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) can provide a measure of protection inthe case of engine backfire. Do not removethe air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary forrepair or maintenance. Make sure that noone is near the engine compartment beforestarting the vehicle with the air inductionsystem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.Failure to do so can result in serious per-sonal injury.

Maintenance-Free BatteryYour vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water,nor is periodic maintenance required.

CAUTION!

• Do not use a portable battery booster packor any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.

• Accessories that can be plugged into thevehicle power outlets draw power from thevehicle’s battery, even when not in use(i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, ifplugged in long enough, the vehicle’s bat-tery will discharge sufficiently to degradebattery life and/or prevent the engine fromstarting.

WARNING!

• When temperatures are below the freezingpoint, electrolyte in a discharged batterymay freeze. Do not attempt jump-startingbecause the battery could rupture or ex-plode and cause personal injury. Battery

(Continued)


temperature must be brought above thefreezing point before attempting a jump-start.

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fanwhenever the hood is raised. It can startanytime the ignition switch is on. You canbe injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make aninadvertent electrical contact. You could beseriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that canburn your skin or eyes and generate hy-drogen gas which is flammable and explo-sive. Keep open flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

• Do not allow vehicles to touch each otheras this could establish a ground connec-tion and personal injury could result.

(Continued)

271



• Do not connect the cable to the negativepost (-) of the discharged battery. Theresulting electrical spark could cause thebattery to explode and could result in per-sonal injury.

Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air condi-tioner should be checked and serviced by anauthorized dealer at the start of each warmseason. This service should include cleaning ofthe condenser fins and a performance test.Drive belt tension should also be checked atthis time.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your airconditioning system as the chemicals candamage your air conditioning components.Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-cants approved by the manufacturer for yourair conditioning system. Some unapprovedrefrigerants are flammable and can explode,injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerantsor lubricants can cause the system to fail,requiring costly repairs. Refer to WarrantyInformation Book, located on the DVD, forfurther warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoid riskof personal injury or damage to the sys-tem, adding refrigerant or any repair re-quiring lines to be disconnected should bedone by an experienced technician.

Refrigerant Recovery And RecyclingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by theEnvironmental Protection Agency and is anozone-saving product. However, the manufac-turer recommends that air conditioning service

be performed by authorized dealer or otherservice facilities using recovery and recyclingequipment.

NOTE:Use only manufacturer approved A/C sys-tem sealers, stop leak products, seal condi-tioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants.

A/C Air FilterRefer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while theblower is operating or personal injury mayresult.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inletbehind the glove box. Perform the followingprocedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove allcontents.

2. Push in on the sides of the glove compart-ment and lower the door.

272


3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that securethe filter cover to the HVAC housing, and re-move the cover.

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straightout of the housing.

6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on thefilter pointing toward the floor. When installingthe filter cover, make sure the retaining tabsfully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow toindicate airflow direction through the filter.Failure to properly install the filter will resultin the need to replace it more often.

7. Rotate the glove compartment door backinto position.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including suchitems as seat tracks, door hinge pivot pointsand rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors andhood hinges, should be lubricated periodicallywith a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR®Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-tion and to protect against rust and wear. Priorto the application of any lubricant, the partsconcerned should be wiped clean to removedust and grit; after lubricating excess oil andgrease should be removed. Particular attentionshould also be given to hood latching compo-nents to ensure proper function. When perform-

ing other underhood services, the hood latch,release mechanism and safety catch should becleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricatedtwice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant di-rectly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades andthe windshield periodically with a sponge or softcloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This willremove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for longperiods may cause deterioration of the wiperblades. Always use washer fluid when using thewipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-shield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost orice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubberout of contact with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc.

A/C Air Filter Replacement

273


NOTE:Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-pending on geographical area and fre-quency of use. Poor performance of bladesmay be present with chattering, marks, wa-ter lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-tions are present, clean the wiper blades orreplace as necessary.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper armupward, this will allow the rear wiper blade to beraised off of the liftgate glass.

NOTE:The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fullyupward unless the pivot cap is raised first.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise thewiper blade off of the liftgate glass.

3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade androtate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pinfrom the wiper blade holder.

4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiperblade holder at the end of the wiper arm, andfirmly press the wiper blade until it snaps intoplace.

5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivotcap into place.

Adding Washer FluidOn vehicles equipped with a Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), the low washer fluidlevel will be indicated. When the sensor detectsa low fluid level, the windshield will light on thevehicle graphic outline and the “WASHERFLUID LOW” message will be displayed.

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washersand the rear window washer is shared. The fluidreservoir is located in the engine compartment,be sure to check the fluid level at regularintervals. Fill the reservoir with windshieldwasher solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, takesome washer fluid and apply it to a cloth ortowel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this willhelp blade performance. To prevent freeze-upof your windshield washer system in coldweather, select a solution or mixture that meets

1 — Wiper Arm2 — Pivot Cap

1 — Wiper Blade2 — Blade Pivot Pin3 — Wiper Arm4 — Wiper Blade Holder

274


or exceeds the temperature range of your cli-mate. This rating information can be found onmost washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washersolvents are flammable. They could igniteand burn you. Care must be exercised whenfilling or working around the washer solution.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaustsystem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detectedinside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear ofthe vehicle is damaged; have an authorized tech-nician inspect the complete exhaust system andadjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deterio-rated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or looseconnections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, havethe exhaust system inspected each time the ve-hicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replaceas required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things ToKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle” forfurther information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if youpark over materials that can burn. Suchmaterials might be grass or leaves cominginto contact with your exhaust system. Donot park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contactanything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use ofunleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline willdestroy the effectiveness of the catalyst asan emissions control device and may seri-ously reduce engine performance andcause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can resultif your vehicle is not kept in proper operatingcondition. In the event of engine malfunc-tion, particularly involving engine misfire orother apparent loss of performance, haveyour vehicle serviced promptly. Continuedoperation of your vehicle with a severe mal-function could cause the converter to over-heat, resulting in possible damage to theconverter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalyticconverter will not require maintenance. How-ever, it is important to keep the engine properlytuned to assure proper catalyst operation andprevent possible catalyst damage.

275


NOTE:Intentional tampering with emissions con-trol systems can result in civil penaltiesbeing assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-tioning engine operation, a scorching odor maysuggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn offthe engine and allow it to cool. Service, includ-ing a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converterdamage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt theignition, when the transmission is in gear andthe vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing ortowing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plugwires disconnected or removed, such aswhen diagnostic testing, or for prolongedperiods during very rough idle or malfunction-ing operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator coolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turnthe ignition switch to the OFF position. Thefan is temperature controlled and can startat any time the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

• You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant ChecksCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-tion every 12 months (before the onset offreezing weather, where applicable). If the en-gine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the systemshould be drained, flushed, and refilled withfresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)only by an authorized dealer. Check the front ofthe A/C condenser for any accumulation ofbugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spray-ing water from a garden hose vertically downthe face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing forbrittle rubber, cracking , tears, cuts and tight-ness of the connection at the bottle and radiator.Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature(but not running), check the cooling system pres-sure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining asmall amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) fromthe radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealingproperly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will beginto drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOTREMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAPWHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

276


Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And RefillIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty orcontains visible sediment, have an authorizeddealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-freeze) (conforming to MS-12106).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

Selection Of CoolantRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) otherthan specified Organic Additive Technology(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may re-sult in engine damage and may decreasecorrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-nology (OAT) engine coolant is different andshould not be mixed with Hybrid OrganicAdditive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”

(Continued)


coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT enginecoolant (antifreeze) is introduced into thecooling system in an emergency, the coolingsystem will need to be drained, flushed, andrefilled with fresh OAT coolant (conformingto MS-12106), by an authorized dealer assoon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-basedengine coolant (antifreeze) products. Donot use additional rust inhibitors or antirustproducts, as they may not be compatiblewith the radiator engine coolant and mayplug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for usewith propylene glycol-based engine cool-ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is notrecommended.

Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built with an improvedengine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance inter-vals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be usedup to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)before replacement. To prevent reducing this ex-tended maintenance period, it is important thatyou use the same engine coolant (OAT coolantconforming to MS-12106) throughout the life ofyour vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for us-ing Organic Additive Technology (OAT) enginecoolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT(Organic Additive Technology) that meets therequirements of Chrysler Material StandardMS-12106.

277


• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT enginecoolant that meets the requirements ofChrysler Material Standard MS-12106 anddistilled water. Use higher concentrations(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled ordeionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The useof lower quality water will reduce the amountof corrosion protection in the engine coolingsystem.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibilityto maintain the proper level of protectionagainst freezing according to the temperaturesoccurring in the area where the vehicle is oper-ated.

NOTE:Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types isnot recommended and can result in coolingsystem damage. If HOAT and OAT coolantare mixed in an emergency, have a autho-rized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OATcoolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soonas possible.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightened to prevent lossof engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensurethat engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to theradiator from the coolant recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned ifthere is any accumulation of foreign material onthe sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT”on the cooling system pressure cap are asafety precaution. Never add engine cool-ant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-heated. Do not loosen or remove the capto cool an overheated engine. Heat causespressure to build up in the cooling system.To prevent scalding or injury, do not re-move the pressure cap while the system ishot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than theone specified for your vehicle. Personalinjury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine CoolantUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-tifreeze) is a regulated substance requiringproper disposal. Check with your local authori-ties to determine the disposal rules for yourcommunity. To prevent ingestion by animals orchildren, do not store ethylene glycol-basedengine coolant in open containers or allow it toremain in puddles on the ground. If ingested bya child or pet, seek emergency assistanceimmediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-diately.

Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a quick visualmethod for determining that the coolant level isadequate. With the engine OFF and cold, thelevel of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in thebottle should be between the ranges indicatedon the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full,so there is no need to remove the radiator capunless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise yourservice attendant of this. As long as the engineoperating temperature is satisfactory, the cool-ant bottle need only be checked once a month.

278


When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) isneeded to maintain the proper level, only OATcoolant that meets the requirements of ChryslerMaterial Standard MS-12106 should be addedto the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE:When the vehicle is stopped after a fewmiles/kilometers of operation, you may ob-serve vapor coming from the front of theengine compartment. This is normally a re-sult of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator andbeing vaporized when the thermostat opens,allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) toenter the radiator.If an examination of your engine compartmentshows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor willsoon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiatorand in the coolant expansion bottle. If enginecoolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the

contents of the coolant expansion bottle mustalso be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-tions are required, the cooling system shouldbe pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant(conforming to MS-12106) and distilled waterfor proper corrosion protection of your enginewhich contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottleoverflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If yourvehicle is equipped with air conditioning,keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer orWinter operation. If replacement is ever nec-essary, install ONLY the correct type thermo-stat. Other designs may result in unsatisfac-tory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake SystemIn order to assure brake system performance,all brake system components should be in-spected periodically. Refer to the “Service andWarranty Handbook” for the proper mainte-nance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failureand possibly a collision. Driving with yourfoot resting or riding on the brake pedal canresult in abnormally high brake tempera-tures, excessive lining wear, and possiblebrake damage. You would not have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

Front/Rear Axle FluidFor normal service, periodic fluid level checksare not required. When the vehicle is servicedfor other reasons the exterior surfaces of theaxle assembly should be inspected. If gear oilleakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.

279


Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion.

Front Axle Fluid Level CheckThe front axle oil level needs to be between1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill holeand the bottom of the fill hole.

The front axle fill and drain plugs should betightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).

CAUTION!

Do not over tighten the plugs as it coulddamage them and cause them to leak.

Rear Axle Fluid Level CheckThe rear axle oil level needs to be between1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill holeand the bottom of the fill hole.

The rear axle fill and drain plugs should betightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axleswith aluminum housings. The rear axle fill anddrain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs(30 to 70 N·m) on axles with cast iron housings.

CAUTION!

Do not over tighten the plugs as it coulddamage then and cause them to leak.

Selection Of LubricantUse only the manufacturer’s recommendedfluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

Transfer CaseFluid Level CheckFor normal service, periodic fluid level checksare not required. When the vehicle is servicedfor other reasons the exterior surfaces of thetransfer case assembly should be inspected. Ifoil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion.

Adding FluidAdd fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of thehole, when the vehicle is in a level position.

DrainFirst remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.Recommended tightening torque for drain andfill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).

CAUTION!

When installing plugs, do not overtighten. Youcould damage them and cause them to leak.

Selection Of LubricantUse only the manufacturer’s recommendedfluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

Automatic TransmissionSelection Of LubricantIt is important to use the proper transmissionfluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-mance and life. Use only the manufacturer’sspecified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sectionfor fluid specifications. It is important to maintainthe transmission fluid at the correct level usingthe recommended fluid.

280


NOTE:No chemical flushes should be used in anytransmission; only the approved lubricantshould be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than themanufacturer’s recommended fluid may causedeterioration in transmission shift qualityand/or torque converter shudder, and will re-quire more frequent fluid and filter changes.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Special AdditivesThe manufacturer strongly recommends againstusing any special additives in the transmission.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engi-neered product and its performance may beimpaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-sion. The only exception to this policy is the useof special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid

using transmission sealers as they may ad-versely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your trans-mission as the chemicals can damage yourtransmission components. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Fluid Level CheckThe fluid level is preset at the factory and does notrequire adjustment under normal operating con-ditions. Routine fluid level checks are not re-quired, therefore the transmission has no dipstick.Your authorized dealer can check your transmis-sion fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission mal-function, visit your authorized dealer immedi-ately to have the transmission fluid levelchecked. Operating the vehicle with an im-proper fluid level can cause severe transmis-sion damage.

CAUTION!

• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visityour authorized dealer immediately. Se-vere transmission damage may occur.Your authorized dealer has the propertools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter ChangesUnder normal operating conditions, the fluidinstalled at the factory will provide satisfactorylubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not re-quired. However, change the fluid and filter ifthe fluid becomes contaminated (with water,etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled forany reason.

281


Appearance Care And ProtectionFrom CorrosionProtection Of Body And Paint FromCorrosionVehicle body care requirements vary accordingto geographic locations and usage. Chemicalsthat make roads passable in snow and ice andthose that are sprayed on trees and road sur-faces during other seasons are highly corrosiveto the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,which exposes your vehicle to airborne con-taminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle isoperated, extreme hot or cold weather andother extreme conditions will have an adverseeffect on paint, metal trim, and underbody pro-tection.

The following maintenance recommendationswill enable you to obtain maximum benefit fromthe corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re-moval of paint and protective coatings from yourvehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always washyour vehicle in the shade using MOPAR®Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinsethe panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits haveaccumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such asMOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,stains and to protect your paint finish. Takecare never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and powerbuffing that may diminish the gloss or thin outthe paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaningmaterials such as steel wool or scouringpowder that will scratch metal and paintedsurfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if youdrive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-riage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the loweredges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunkbe kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches inthe paint, touch them up immediately. Thecost of such repairs is considered the re-sponsibility of the owner.

282


• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collisionor similar cause that destroys the paint andprotective coating, have your vehicle re-paired as soon as possible. The cost of suchrepairs is considered the responsibility of theowner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that suchmaterials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,consider mud or stone shields behind eachwheel.

• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratchesas soon as possible. Your authorized dealerhas touch up paint to match the color of yourvehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-num and chrome plated wheels, should becleaned regularly with a mild soap and waterto prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brakedust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not useoven cleaner. These products may damagethe wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automaticcar washes that use acidic solutions or harshbrushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaneror equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – IfEquippedStain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow-ing manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible byblotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damptowel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean,or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp clothand remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel toremove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth andremove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel toremove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any otherform of protectants on Stain Repel products.

283


Interior CareUse MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-stery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl uphol-stery.

MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recom-mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved byregular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Smallparticles of dirt can act as an abrasive anddamage the leather upholstery and should beremoved promptly with a damp cloth. Stubbornsoils can be removed easily with a soft cloth andMOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken toavoid soaking your leather upholstery with anyliquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaningfluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-basedcleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Appli-cation of a leather conditioner is not required tomaintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaningpurposes. Many are potentially flammable,and if used in closed areas they may causerespiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/orKeton based cleaning products to cleanleather seats, as damage to the seat mayresult.

Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on aregular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, orany commercial household-type glass cleaner.Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use cau-tion when cleaning the inside rear window

equipped with electric defrosters or the rightrear quarter window equipped with the radioantenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharpinstrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spraycleaner on the towel or rag that you are using.Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster LensesThe lenses in front of the instruments in thisvehicle are molded in clear plastic. When clean-ing the lenses, care must be taken to avoidscratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soapsolution may be used, but do not use highalcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap isused, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

284


Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye, or clean the belts withchemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This willweaken the fabric. Sun damage can alsoweaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® TotalClean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.Do not remove the belts from the vehicle towash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or wornor if the buckles do not work properly.

FUSES

Power Distribution CenterThe Power Distribution Center is located in theengine compartment near the battery. This cen-ter contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,and circuit breakers. A description of each fuseand component may be stamped on the insidecover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuseis stamped on the inside cover that correspondsto the following chart.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF03 60 Amp Yellow Rad FanF05 40 Amp Green Compressor for Air Suspension if equippedF06 40 Amp Green Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control PumpF07 40 Amp Green Starter SolenoidF08 40 Amp Green Emission sensors (Diesel engine only)F09 40 Amp Green Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)F10 40 Amp Green Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2F11 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped

Power Distribution Center

285


Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF12 40 Amp Green Body Controller #3 / Interior LightsF13 40 Amp Green Blower Motor FrontF14 40 Amp Green Body Controller #4 / Power LocksF17 30 Amp Pink Headrest Release - If EquippedF20 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door ModuleF22 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control ModuleF23 30 Amp Pink Body Controller #1F24 30 Amp Pink Driver Door ModuleF25 30 Amp Pink Front WipersF26 30 Amp Pink Antilock Brakes/Stability Control Module/ValvesF28 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If EquippedF29 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If EquippedF30 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle - If EquippedF32 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control ModuleF34 30 Amp Pink Slip Differential ControlF35 30 Amp Pink Sunroof - If EquippedF36 30 Amp Pink Rear DefrosterF37 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower - If EquippedF38 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter 115V AC - If EquippedF39 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate - If Equipped

286


Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF40 10 Amp Red Daytime Running LightsF42 20 Amp Yellow HornF44 10 Amp Red Diagnostic PortF46 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure MonitorF49 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack / Climate ControlF50 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module - If EquippedF51 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition / Steering

Column LockF52 5 Amp Tan Battery SensorF53 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If EquippedF56 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)F57 15 Amp Blue TransmissionF59 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)F60 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control ModuleF62 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning ClutchF63 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)F64 25 Amp Natural Fuel Injectors / PowertrainF66 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain SensorF67 15 Amp Blue CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module - If

Equipped

287


Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF68 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper MotorF70 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MotorF71 30 Amp Green Audio AmplifierF73 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps RightF74 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump - If EquippedF76 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability ControlF77 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect

ModuleF78 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering - If

EquippedF80 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /

Anti-Intrusion ModuleF81 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop LightsF82 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise ControlF83 10 Amp Red Fuel DoorF84 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument ClusterF85 10 Amp Red Airbag ModuleF86 10 Amp Red Airbag ModuleF87 10 Amp Red Air Suspension / Trailer Tow / Steering Column

Control ModuleF88 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster

288


Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse DescriptionF90/F91 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable

F92 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp - If EquippedF93 20 Amp Yellow Cigar LighterF94 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case ModuleF95 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park AssistF96 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger - If

EquippedF97 25 Amp Natural Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel - If

EquippedF98 25 Amp Natural Front Heated Seats - If EquippedF99 10 Amp Red Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems ModuleF100 10 Amp Red Active Damping - If EquippedF101 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams - If

EquippedF103 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel engine only)F104 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)

289


CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution cen-ter cover, it is important to ensure thecover is properly positioned and fullylatched. Failure to do so may allow waterto get into the power distribution centerand possibly result in an electrical systemfailure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-tant to use only a fuse having the correctamperage rating. The use of a fuse with arating other than indicated may result in adangerous electrical system overload. If aproperly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that mustbe corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are leaving your vehicle dormant for morethan 21 days you may want to take steps toprotect your battery. You may:

• Disconnect the negative cable from the bat-tery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it outof service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks ormore, run the air conditioning system at idlefor about five minutes in the fresh air andhigh blower setting. This will ensure ad-equate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when thesystem is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Glove Box Lamp 194

Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W

Overhead ConsoleReading Lamps VT4976

Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2

Visor Vanity Lamp V26377

UnderpanelCourtesy Lamps 906

Instrument Cluster(General Illumination) 103

Telltale/HazardLamp 74

290


Exterior Bulbs

Bulb NumberHeadlamps(Low Beam) H11

Premium Head-lamps (Low/HighBeam)

D3S (Serviced atAuthorized Dealer)

Headlamps(High Beam) 9005

Premium Park/TurnSignal Lamp

LED - (Service atAuthorized Dealer)

Daytime RunningLamp (DRL) 3157K

Premium DaytimeRunning Lamp(DRL)


Front Fog Lamps H11Front Side Marker W5WPremium FrontSide Marker - IfEquipped


Front Park/Turn Lamp T20

Bulb NumberRear Body SideTurn Signal Lamps 7440NA (WY21W)

Auxiliary Liftgate TailLamps


Liftgate BackupLamps 921 (W16W)

Rear LicenseLamps


Rear Body SideStop Lamps P27/7W

Rear Body Side TailLamps


CHMSL - CenterHigh Mounted StopLamp


NOTE:Numbers refer to commercial bulb types thatcan be purchased from your authorizeddealer.If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit yourauthorized dealer or refer to the applicableService Manual.

BULB REPLACEMENTNOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-spheric conditions. This will usually clear asatmospheric conditions change to allow thecondensation to change back into a vapor.Turning the lamps on will usually acceleratethe clearing process.

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps(HID) – If EquippedThe headlamps are a type of high voltagedischarge tube. High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the headlamp switch off andthe key removed. Because of this, you shouldnot attempt to service a headlamp bulb your-self. If a headlamp bulb fails, take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

291


WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulbsockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps when the headlamp switch isturned ON. It may cause serious electricalshock or electrocution if not serviced prop-erly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE:On vehicles equipped with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps , when the head-lamps are turned on, there is a blue hue tothe lamps. This diminishes and becomesmore white after approximately 10 seconds,as the system charges.

Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarterturn counterclockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and re-place the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with any oilysurface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Turn Signal1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turncounterclockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and re-place the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with any oilysurface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Fog Lamps1. Reach through the cutout in the splashshield and disconnect the wiring harness fromthe fog lamp connector.

2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches andsqueeze them together to unlock the bulb fromthe back of the front fog lamp housing.

3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyedopening in the housing.

CAUTION!

• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with any oilysurface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

• Always use the correct bulb size and typefor replacement. An incorrect bulb size ortype may overheat and cause damage tothe lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring.

292


4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lampbulb with the slots in the collar of the bulbopening on the back of the front fog lamphousing.

5. Insert the bulb into the housing until theindex tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.

6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight intothe lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly intoplace and are fully engaged.

7. Connect the wiring harness to the front foglamp connector.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, AndBackup Lamps1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamphousing.

3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearwardto disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.

4. Twist socket counter clockwise and removefrom lamp.

5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, andreattach the lamp assembly.

Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver topry the lower trim from the liftgate.

3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.

4. Open the flipper glass.

5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of windowopening.

6. Remove small trim panel around liftgateglass striker.

7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.

8. Continue removing the trim.

9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.

293


10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)counter clockwise.

11. Remove/replace bulb(s).

12. Reinstall the socket(s)

13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgatetrim.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp(CHMSL)The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LEDassembly. See your authorized dealer for re-placement.

Rear License Lamp1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service atAuthorized Dealer.

Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

294


FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate) 25 Gallons 94 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

Cooling System*

6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming toMS-12106) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 16 Quarts 15.5 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

295


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Or-

ganic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.Engine Oil – Non ACEA Categories We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-40 synthetic engine oil, meeting the requirements

of Chrysler MS-12633.Engine Oil – ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for service fill oil, we recommend

you use API Certified SAE 0W-40 synthetic engine oil, meeting the requirements of ChryslerMS-12633 and ACEA C3.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).Fuel Selection We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 98 Octane

296


Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission We recommend you only use MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid or

equivalent.Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensedATF+4 product.

Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-GL5).Axle Differential (Rear) – Without ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-GL5).

Axle Differential (Rear) – With ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-GL5) withfriction modifier.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® Brake & Clutch Fluid DOT 4, that meets the requirements ofChrysler Material Standard MS-9971.

Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, or MOPAR® ATF+4 AutomaticTransmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4 product.

297


298


8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300• Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

299


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe oil change indicator system will remind youthat it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-uled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will bedisplayed in the EVIC and a single chime willsound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

The oil change indicator message will illuminateapproximately 11 200 km after the most recentoil change was performed. Have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible, within 800 km.However, an earlier oil change at 5 000 km maybe required if the vehicle is operated under“Severe Duty Conditions” later in this section.

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will notmonitor the time since the last oil change.Change your vehicles oil if it has been6 months since your last oil change evenif the oil change indicator message isNOT illuminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if youdrive your vehicle off-road for an ex-tended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 12 000 km or 6 months,whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil changeindicator message after completing the sched-uled oil change. If this scheduled oil change isperformed by someone other than your autho-rized dealer the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under ”Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for more infor-mation.

• At Each Stop for Fuel

Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes aftera fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking theoil level while the vehicle is on level ground willimprove the accuracy of the oil level reading.Add oil only when the level is at or below theADD or MIN mark.

Check the windshield washer solvent and add ifrequired.

• Once a Month

Check tire pressure and look for unusual wearor damage.

Inspect the battery and clean and tighten theterminals as required.

Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,brake master cylinder, and power steering andadd as needed.

Check all lights and other electrical items forcorrect operation.

• At Each Oil Change

Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenanceitems may result in damage to the vehicle.

300


Required Maintenance Intervals

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6 MonthsMaintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before7,000 miles (12 000 km)

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

15,000 miles (24 000 km)❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:

police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.




301


22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 18 MonthsMaintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.††❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of


❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends

and boot seals; replace if necessary.







❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if

necessary.❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.

Change if using your vehicle for any ofthe following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road,or frequent trailer towing.










302




engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:











303



60,000 miles (96 000 km)❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:








❏ Replace the spark plugs. ** Spark plug change interval is mileagebased only, Monthly intervals do notapply.






304




engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 168 000 km.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:











305



90,000 miles (144 000 km)❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:











306




engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:













307



120,000 miles (192 000 km)❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:





127,500 Miles (204,000 km) or102 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil






308




engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following:











309


† This maintenance is recommended by themanufacturer to the owner, but is not required tomaintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Do only that servicework for which you have the knowledge andthe right equipment. If you have any doubtabout your ability to perform a service job,take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Severe Duty Conditions†† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter atevery 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months ifusing your vehicle under any of the followingsevere duty conditions:

• Stop and go driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 16 km.

• Trailer towing.

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercialservice).

• Off-road or desert operation.




❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if

necessary.❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.

Change if using your vehicle for any ofthe following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road,or frequent trailer towing.




310


9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314• ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315• AUSTRALIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315• AUSTRIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315• BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316• BELGIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316• BOLIVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316• BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317• BULGARIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317• CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317• CHINA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318• COLOMBIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318• COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318• CROATIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319• CZECH REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319• DENMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319• DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• EL SALVADOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

311


• ESTONIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321• FINLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321• FRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321• GERMANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322• GREECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322• GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322• HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323• HUNGARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323• IRELAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323• ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324• LATVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324• LITHUANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324• LUXEMBURG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325• NETHERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325• NEW ZEALAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325• NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326• PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326• PARAGUAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326• PERU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327• POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327• PORTUGAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327• PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328• REUNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328• ROMANIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328• RUSSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329• SLOVAKIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329• SLOVENIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

312


• SPAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330• SWEDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330• SWITZERLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330• TAIWAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• TURKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• UKRAINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• UNITED KINGDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332• URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332• VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

313


IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer distributors are vitally inter-ested in your satisfaction with their productsand services. If a servicing problem or otherdifficulty should occur, we recommend that youtake the following steps:

Discuss the problem at the authorized dealerwith the dealer principal or the service manager.Management personnel at the authorizeddealer are in the best position to resolve theproblem.

When you contact the distributor please provideall of the following information:

• Your name, address and phone number.

• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digitnumber is found on an etched plate or label,located on the left front corner of the instru-ment panel, visible through the windshield. Itis also available from your vehicle registra-tion or title).

• Selling and servicing authorized dealer.

• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometerdistance.

• Service history of your vehicle.

• An accurate description of the problem andthe conditions under which it occurs.

314


ARGENTINAChrysler Argentina S.A

Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435

C1107CII

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel.: +54-11-4891 7900

Fax: +54-11-4891 7901

AUSTRALIAChrysler Australia Pty. Ltd.

ACN 124 956 505

PO Box 23267, Docklands Victoria 3008

Ph. (03) 8698-0200

AUSTRIAJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 20 1741International Toll NumberTel: + 39 02 444 12 045

Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 201745International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 201747International Toll NumberTel: Not Available

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main Europeancountries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.

315


BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEANInteramericana Trading Corporation

Warrens, St. Michael

Barbados, West Indies

BB22026, P0 Box 98

Tel.: 246–417–8000

Fax: 246–425–2888

BELGIUMJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 55 888International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12 045

Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 18 142International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 16 166International Toll NumberTel: Not Available

BOLIVIAOvando & Cia S.A.

Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y CanalIsuto

Santa Cruz, Bolivia

PO Box 6852

Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100

Fax: (591-3) 334 0229


316


BRAZILChrysler do Brasil

Rua Funchal, 418 - 16º andar CJ 1601/1602,Vila Olímpia

04551-060 Sao Paulo – S.P., Brazil

Tel: +5511 4949 3900

Fax: +5511 4949 3905

BULGARIABALKAN STAR

Resbarska Str. 5

1510 Sofia

Tel.: 359 2 91988

Fax: 359 2 945 40 14

CHILEComercial Chrysler S.A.

Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, Quilicura

Santiago, Chile

Zip Code 101931-7, 367-V

Tel.: +562 837 1300

Fax: +562 6039196


317


CHINAChrysler Group (China) Sales Limited

16F,Gemdale Plaza Tower A

No.91 Jian Guo Road

Chaoyang District

Beijing 100022, P.R. China

Chrysler Brand Tel: 400-650-1195

Dodge Brand Tel: 400-650-0118

COLOMBIAChrysler Colombia S.A.

Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25

Zip Code 110931

Bogotá Colombia

Tel: +57 1 745 5777

Fax: +57 1 410 5667

COSTA RICAAutoStar

La Uruca, frente al Banco Nacional

San José, Costa Rica

PO Box 705-1150

Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000

Fax: (506) 295 - 0052


318


CROATIAAutocommerce Hrvatska d.o.o.

Jablanska 80

10 000 Zagreb

Tel: 00 385 1 3869 001

Fax: 00 385 1 3869 069

CZECH REPUBLICFiat CR s.r.o.

Karolinska 650/1

186 00 Praha 8 – Karlin

Czech Republic

Tel: +420 2 24806 111

Fax: +420 2 24806 312

DENMARKJeep Customer Service*


Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 80 20 30 35International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 80 20 30 36International Toll NumberTel: Not Available


319


DOMINICAN REPUBLICReid y Compañia

John F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de Vega

Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic

Tel.: (809) 562–7211

Fax: (809) 565-8774

ECUADORChrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador

Av. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5

Guayaquil, Ecuador

Tel.: +593 4 2244101

Fax: +593 4 2244273

EL SALVADORGrupo Q del Salvador

Ave. Las Amapolas (Autopista Sur)

Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas deSan Francisco,

San Salvador, El Salvador

Zip Code 152

Tel.: +503 2248 6400

Fax: +503 278 5731


320


ESTONIASilberauto AS

Järvevana tee 11

11314 Tallinn

Tel.: +372 53337946

Tel.: 06 266 072

Fax: 06 266 066

[email protected]

FINLANDAutoFennica

Ristipellontie 5

00390 HELSINKI

Tel: 020 54771

Fax: 020 5477 485

FRANCEJeep Customer Service*





321


GERMANYJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 0426533International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12 045



GREECEChrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas

240-242 Kifisias Avenue

15231 Halandri Athens, Greece

Tel.: +30 210 6700800

Fax: +30 210 6700820

GUATEMALAGrupo Q del Guatemala

Km 16 carretera a El Salvador, condado con-cepción

Ciudad de Guatemala, Guatemala

Zip Code 1004

Tel.: +502 6685 9500


322


HONDURASGrupo Q de Honduras

Blvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores,

Tegucigalpa, Honduras

Tel.: +504 2290 3700

Fax: +504 2232 6564

HUNGARYFiat Hungary Co. Ltd.

H-1123 Budapest

Alkotás u. 53.

Tel.:+36-1-458-3100

Fax: +36-1-458-3148

IRELANDJeep Customer Service*





323


ITALYJeep Customer Service*




LATVIATC MOTORS LTD.

41 Krasta Str.

LV-1003 Riga

Tel.: +37167812 313

Mob.: +371 29498662

Fax: +371 67812313

SIA “Autobrava”

G.Astras street 5,

LV-1084 Riga

Tel.: +371 67812312

Mob.: +371 29498662

Fax +371 671 462 56

LITHUANIASilberauto AS

Pirklių g. 9

LT-02300 Vilnius

Tel +370 52 665956, GSM +370 698 24950

Fax +370 52 665951

[email protected]


324


LUXEMBURGJeep Customer Service*




NETHERLANDSJeep Customer Service*




NEW ZEALANDChrysler New Zealand

Private Bag 14907

Panmure New Zealand

Tel: 09573 7800

Fax: 09573 7808


325


NORWAYRSA BIL

Øvre Eikervei 77

N-3048 Drammen

Tel.: +47 32 21 88 00

Fax: +47 32 82 60 99

PANAMAAutomotora Autostar S. A.

Avenida Domingo Diaz, Via Tocumen, Frente ala Urbanizacion El Crisol

Panamá, Panamá

Tel.: +507 233 7222

Fax: +507 233 2843

PARAGUAYGarden Autolider S.A

Av. República de Argentina esq. FacundoMachain

Asuncion, Paraguay

Tel.: +595 21 664 580

Fax: +595 21 664 579


326


PERUDivemotor S.A.

Av. Canada 1160, Urb. Sta. Catalina

Lima, Peru

Zip Code Lima 13

Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000

Fax: (51-1) 712 2002

POLANDFiat Auto Poland S.A.

ul. M. Grażyńskiego 141,

43-300 Bielsko-Biała

Tel: +48 (033) 813-21-00, 813-51-00

PORTUGALChrysler Portugal S.A.

Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Dª Amélia

Rua Victor Câmara, 2 1ªA

2770-229 Paço de Arcos

Portugal

Tel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00

Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99


327


PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGINISLANDSChrysler International Services, S.A.

Calle 1 lote 1 Suite 205, Metro Office Park

Guaynabo, Puerto Rico

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 009191857

Tel.: 7877825757

Fax: 7877823345

REUNIONCOTRANS AUTOMOBILES

17 Bd du Chaudron, 97490 Sainte Clotilde

Tel: 0262920000

Fax: 0262488443

ROMANIAAUTO ITALIA IMPEX SRL

Bd. Timisoara nr. 60/D

Bucuresti, ROMANIA

Tel: +40 (0)21.444.333.4

Fax: +40 (0)21.444.2779

www.autoitalia.ro


328


RUSSIAChrysler Russia SAO

Testovskaya street, 10

123317 Moscow,

Tel +7(495)-745-26-36

Fax +7(495)-745-26-37

SLOVAKIAFiat SR s.r.o

Dubravska cesta 2

841 05 Bratislava 45

Slovakia

Tel: +421 2 593099 901

Fax: +421 2 593099 911

SLOVENIAAvto Triglav d.o.o.

Dunajska 122

1000 Ljubljana

Tel: 01 5883 400

Fax: 01 5883 487


329


SPAINJeep Customer Service*




SWEDENJeep Customer Service*




SWITZERLANDJeep Customer Service*





330


TAIWANChrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD.

13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza

1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3

Taipei Taiwan R.O.C.

Tel.: 080081581

Fax: 886225471871

TURKEYTofaş Türk Otomobil Fabrikasi A.S.

Büyükdere Cad, No:145 Tofaş Han Zincirlikuyu

ISTAMBUL

Tel: (0212) 444 5337

Tel: (0212) 275 2960

Telefax: (0212) 275 0357

UKRAINEPJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”

Chervonoarmiyska Str. 15/2

01004 Kyiv

Tel : +380 44 206 8888

+380 44 201 6060

Fax: +380 44 206 8889


331


UNITED KINGDOMJeep Customer Service*




URUGUAYSEVEL Uruguay S. A.

Convenio 820

Montevideo, Uruguay

Zip Code 11700

Tel: +598 220 02980

Fax: +598 2209-0116

VENEZUELAChrysler de Venezuela LLC

Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona IndustrialNorte

Valencia, Estado Caraboro

Tel: +(58) 241-613 2400

Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538

Fax: (58) 241-6132602

(58) 241-6132438

PO BOX: 1960

Services And Parts

Zona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C CalleEste-Oeste

C.C LD Center Local B-2

Valencia, Estado Carabobo

Telf: (58) 241-6132757

(58) 241-6132773

Fax: (58) 241-6132743


332


333


334


10INDEX

335


Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .277Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 45Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . .43, 47, 58, 151Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43, 44, 45Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . .41, 43, 45Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner

Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . .272Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . .197, 272Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .198Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . .272Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . .196, 272Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . .15, 151Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . .8Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .277, 295

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .218Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .147Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .25Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . .67Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .196Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .207, 281

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . .281Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . .280, 281Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .281

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .132Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Keyless TransmitterReplacement (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .18

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 58Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . .273Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . .218

Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . .206Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . .57Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .290, 291Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . .278

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . .58Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Cargo Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . .137Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . .294Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . .57Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

336


Child Restraint . . . . . . . .48, 50, 52, 53, 54Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . .52, 53Child Safety Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . .204Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . .191Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .278Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .277Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .295Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . .276, 278Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . .278Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .277Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .279Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Selection of Coolant(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 295

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . .100

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134Customer Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . .314

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .89Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . .140Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .58, 194Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .278Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .21Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, or ShallowStanding Water . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .206Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary

(Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . .140Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .68Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .218

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . .218Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . .219Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 100

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .219Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . .260Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .250Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .57Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . .269Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .276Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . .29, 58Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .204Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . .235, 295Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 295Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .148

337


Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .45Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . .17Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . .29, 58Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 275Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

FiltersAir Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .197, 272Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . .270

Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Turn Signal . . . . . . . .59, 147, 292, 293

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . .204Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Fluid Level Checks

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . .296Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 147, 292Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . .113Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . .250Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .260Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . .279Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .206Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .235, 295Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . .268Gasoline, Clean Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . .148Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207General Information . . . . . . . . .15, 19, 111

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . .241Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . .240GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

HazardDriving Through Flowing, Rising, orShallow Standing Water . . . . . . . .214

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .250Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .292On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 140High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

IgnitionKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . .14Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . .67Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . .145Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . .284

338


Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . .284Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . .94Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253, 254Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . .22, 203Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .14

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 53Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . .140Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 87

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 47, 58, 151Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . .88Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .222Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .291Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . .294Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . .87Electronic Stability Program (ESP)Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 147, 292Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .250Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 292Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . .88High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . .147Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Malfunction Indicator(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .147Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . .151Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Service Engine Soon (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .150Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Turn Signal . . . . . . . .59, 87, 292, 293Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 53

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . .271Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . .269

339


Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . .300Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . .84Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . .84Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . .67Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Power Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . .8Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . .230Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . .87

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . .57

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . .29, 43, 45Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . .41, 43, 45

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . .235Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . .270Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .295Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 295

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Onboard Diagnostic System. . . . . . . . .268Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .268Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . .6Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .68Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . .148, 250Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . .6

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . .115, 120Passing Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

PowerDistribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .285Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .132Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 75Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 130Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . .96Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts. . . . . . .39Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . .255Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Programming Transmitters

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . .17

Radial Ply Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . .278Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . .190Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . .95Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . .279Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Rear Cupholder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

340


Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . .115, 120Rear Seat, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . .140Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .17Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . .190Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . .138Roll Over Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . .58Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . .59Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . .29, 58Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .300Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .285

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 58

Adjustable Upper ShoulderAnchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .39Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 54Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . .34Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .34

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . .151Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .14Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . .15Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .15Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Automatic Transmission . . . . . .205, 207Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . .59, 147, 292, 293SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 227, 255Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .98, 100Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .202Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . .204

Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . .202Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . .190Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 290Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 290Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 130Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

341


Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag. . .39Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . .96Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . .196Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . .148Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . .52Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .139Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 223

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .228Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .226General Information . . . . . . . . . . .223High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .224Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .230Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .150Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .228

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . .243Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .259Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .248Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . .248Traction Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . .222Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .247Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . .243Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . .243Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .205, 207, 280Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Transmitter Battery Service (RemoteKeyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Transmitter Programming (RemoteKeyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . .17Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .228Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . .147, 292, 293

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . .34

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . .8Vehicle Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . .8Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 290Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .250Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .93, 274Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Wheel and Wheel Trim. . . . . . . . . . . .283

342


Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . .283Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . .26, 129, 131Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . .273Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . .273Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . .95

343


page position: 1 @zeta.tweddle.com ... · failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts...

Documents